Yamaha HTR-6280 de handleiding

Merk: Yamaha

Model: HTR-6280

Categorie: Ontvanger

Type: de handleiding

Deze handleiding is ook geschikt voor

HTR-5150

HTR-5150

Natural Sound AV Receiver

Ampli-Tuner audio-vidéo

OWNER’S MANUAL

MODE D’EMPLOI

HTR-5150

Printed in Malaysia ID

V403350

U C A T

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.

YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA

YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY

YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND

YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN

YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA

04HTR-5150-e/f cv1/4 6/28/99, 2:31 PM1

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

1 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions

should be read before the unit is operated.

2 Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions

should be retained for future reference.

3 Heed Warnings – All warnings on the unit and in the

operating instructions should be adhered to.

4 Follow Instructions – All operating and other instructions

should be followed.

5 Water and Moisture – The unit should not be used near

water – for example, near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen

sink, laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming

pool, etc.

6 Carts and Stands – The unit should be used only with a

cart or stand that is recommended by the

manufacturer.

6A A unit and cart combination should be moved

with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and

uneven surfaces may cause the unit and cart

combination to overturn.

7 Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted to a

wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer.

8 Ventilation – The unit should be situated so that its location

or position does not interfere with its proper ventilation. For

example, the unit should not be situated on a bed, sofa,

rug, or similar surface, that may block the ventilation

openings; or placed in a built-in installation, such as a

bookcase or cabinet that may impede the flow of air

through the ventilation openings.

9 Heat – The unit should be situated away from heat sources

such as radiators, stoves, or other appliances that produce

heat.

10 Power Sources – The unit should be connected to a power

supply only of the type described in the operating instruc-

tions or as marked on the unit.

11 Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be

routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or

pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying

particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience recep-

tacles, and the point where they exit from the unit.

12 Cleaning – The unit should be cleaned only as recom-

mended by the manufacturer.

13 Nonuse Periods – The power cord of the unit should be

unplugged from the outlet when left unused for a long

period of time.

14 Object and Liquid Entry – Care should be taken so that

objects do not fall into and liquids are not spilled into the

inside of the unit.

15 Damage Requiring Service – The unit should be serviced

by qualified service personnel when:

A. The power-supply cord or the plug has been

damaged; or

B. Objects have fallen, or liquid has been spilled into the

unit; or

C. The unit has been exposed to rain; or

D. The unit does not appear to operate normally or exhibits

a marked change in performance; or

E. The unit has been dropped, or the cabinet damaged.

16 Servicing – The user should not attempt to service the unit

beyond those means described in the operating instruc-

tions. All other servicing should be referred to qualified

service personnel.

17 Power Lines – An outdoor antenna should be located away

from power lines.

18 Grounding or Polarization – Precautions should be taken

so that the grounding or polarization is not defeated.

• Explanation of Graphical Symbols

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol,

within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert

you to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous

voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may

be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of

electric shock to persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral

triangle is intended to alert you to the presence

of important operating and maintenance

(servicing) instructions in the literature

accompanying the appliance.

WARNING

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR

ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS

UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF

ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE

COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE

PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO

QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

CAUTION

01RX-V595a-e/f1 6/24/99, 11:42 AM2

English

19 For US customers only:

Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna is

connected to this unit, be sure the antenna system is

grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage

surges and built-up static charges. Article 810 of the

National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides informa-

tion with regard to proper grounding of the mast and

supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an

antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors,

location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding

electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode.

FCC INFORMATION (for US customers only)

We Want You Listening For A Lifetime

YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer

Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your

equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound

come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or

distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your

sensitive hearing.

Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often

undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the

Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer

Electronics Group recommend you to avoid

prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels.

Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee

that interference will not occur in all installations. If this

product is found to be the source of interference, which

can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”,

please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the

following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being

affected by the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit

breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient

the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon

lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfac-

tory results, please contact the local retailer authorized

to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate

the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha

Electronics Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave,

Buena Park, CA 90620.

The above statements apply ONLY to those products

distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its

subsidiaries.

1. IMPORTANT NOTICE : DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the

instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC

requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by

Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC,

to use the product.

2. IMPORTANT : When connecting this product to

accessories and/or another product use only high

quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this

product MUST be used. Follow all installation instruc-

tions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC

authorization to use this product in the USA.

3. NOTE : This product has been tested and found to

comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regula-

tions, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance

with these requirements provides a reasonable level of

assurance that your use of this product in a residential

environment will not result in harmful interference with

other electronic devices.

This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and,

if not installed and used according to the instructions

found in the users manual, may cause interference

harmful to the operation of other electronic devices.

Note to CATV system installer:

This reminder is provided to call the CATV system

installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that

provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in

particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be

connected to the grounding system of the building, as

close to the point of cable entry as practical.

EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING

MAST

GROUND

CLAMP

ANTENNA

LEAD IN

WIRE

ANTENNA

DISCHARGE UNIT

(NEC SECTION 810–20)

GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

(NEC SECTION 810–21)

GROUND CLAMPS

POWER SERVICE GROUNDING

ELECTRODE SYSTEM

(NEC ART 250. PART H)

ELECTRIC

SERVICE

EQUIPMENT

NEC

– NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

01RX-V595a-e/f1 6/24/99, 11:42 AM3

SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES

ACCESSOIRES FOURNIS

• After unpacking, check that the following parts are included.

• Après le déballage, vérifier que les pièces suivantes sont incluses.

• Indoor FM Antenna

• Antenne FM intérieure

• AM Loop Antenna

• Cadre-antenne AM

• Antenna adapter

(U.S.A. and Canada models only)

• Adaptateur d’antenne

(Modèles pour les États-Unis et le

Canada seulement)

• Batteries (size AA, R6, UM-3)

• Piles (taille AA, R6, UM-3)

• Remote control

Before using the remote control, install the supplied

batteries. See page 48 for battery installation.

• Télécommande

Avant d’utiliser la télécommande, mettre les piles fournies en

place. Pour la mise en place des piles, voir page 98.

01RX-V595a-e/f1 6/24/99, 11:42 AM4

English

5-Channel Power Amplification

Mininum RMS Output

(0.04% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz)

U.S.A. and Canada models

Main: 70 W + 70 W (8 Ω)

Center: 70 W (8 Ω)

Rear: 70 W + 70 W (8 Ω)

Australia and China models

Main: 65 W + 65 W (8 Ω)

Center: 65 W (8 Ω)

Rear: 65 W + 65 W (8 Ω)

Multi-mode Digital Sound Field Processing

● Digital Sound Field Processor (DSP)

● Dolby Digital Decoder

● Dolby Pro Logic Decoder

● DTS Decoder

SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES........................................... 4

FEATURES .................................................................... 5

CAUTION ....................................................................... 6

●Introduction

FEATURES OF THE SOUND EFFECTS....................... 7

CONTROLS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS ....................... 10

●Preparation

SPEAKER SETUP ....................................................... 13

CONNECTIONS........................................................... 14

ADJUSTMENTS BEFORE USING THIS UNIT............ 21

●Basic Operation

BASIC OPERATION .................................................... 26

TUNING ....................................................................... 30

SETTING THE SLEEP TIMER..................................... 35

●Information about DSP

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM ......................................... 36

●Advanced Information

ADJUSTMENTS IN THE “SET MENU” MODE ............ 41

●Remote control

REMOTE CONTROL ................................................... 43

SETUP CODES ...........................................................49

TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................. 50

SPECIFICATIONS ....................................................... 53

LIST OF MANUFACTURERS’ CODES...................... 105

FEATURES

CONTENTS

● CINEMA DSP: Theater-like Sound

Experience by the Combination of

YAMAHA DSP Technology and Dolby

Digital, Dolby Pro Logic or DTS

● Automatic Input Balance Control for

Dolby Pro Logic decoding

● Test Tone Generator for Easier Speaker

Balance Adjustment

● Speaker Output Mode Selection

Sophisticated FM/AM Tuner

● 40-Station Random Access Preset Tuning

● Automatic Preset Tuning

● Preset Station Shifting Capability

(Preset Editing)

● 6-Channel External Decoder Input for

Other Future Formats

● Video Signal Input/Output Capability

(Including S Video Connections)

● SLEEP Timer

● Universal Remote Control with Preset

Manufacturer Codes

01RX-V595a-e/f1 6/24/99, 11:42 AM5

CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.

1. To assure the finest performance, please read this manual

carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference.

2. Install this unit in a cool, dry, clean place – away from

windows, heat sources, sources of excessive vibration,

dust, moisture and cold. Avoid sources of humming

(transformers, motors). To prevent fire or electrical shock,

do not expose the unit to rain or water.

3. Never open the cabinet. If something drops into the set,

contact your dealer.

4. Do not use force on switches, controls or connection wires.

When moving the unit, first disconnect the power plug and

the wires connected to other equipment. Never pull the

wires themselves.

5. The openings on the cover assure proper ventilation of the

unit. If these openings are obstructed, the temperature

inside the unit will rise rapidly. Therefore, avoid placing

objects against these openings, and install the unit in a

well-ventilated area to prevent fire and damage.

Be sure to allow a space of at least 20 cm behind, 20 cm

on both sides and 30 cm above the top panel of the unit to

prevent fire and damage.

6. The voltage used must be the same as that specified on

this unit. Using this unit with a higher voltage than

specified is dangerous and may result in fire or other

accidents. YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any

damage resulting from the use of this unit with a voltage

other than that specified.

7. Digital signals generated by this unit may interfere with

other equipment such as tuners, receivers and TVs. Move

this unit farther away from such equipment if interference is

observed.

8. Always set the VOLUME control to “

” before starting the

audio source play. Increase the volume gradually to an

appropriate level after playback has been started.

9. Do not attempt to clean the unit with chemical solvents; this

might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.

10. Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section

regarding common operating errors before concluding that

the unit is faulty.

11. When not planning to use this unit for a long period of time

(e.g., a vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the

wall outlet.

12. To prevent lightning damage, disconnect the AC power

plug and disconnect the antenna cable when there is an

electrical storm.

13. Grounding or polarization – Precautions should be taken so

that the grounding or polarization of the unit is not

defeated.

14. AC outlet

Do not connect audio equipment to the AC outlet on the

rear panel if that equipment requires more power than the

outlet is rated to provide.

15. Voltage Selector (China model only)

The voltage selector on the rear panel of this unit must

be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging

into the AC main supply.

Voltages are 110/120/220/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz.

This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as

long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit

itself is turned off. This state is called the standby mode. In

this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small

quantity of power.

FREQUENCY STEP switch

(China model only)

Because the interstation frequency spacing differs in

different areas, set the FREQUENCY STEP switch (located

at the rear) according to the frequency spacing in your area.

Before setting this switch, disconnect the AC power plug of

this unit from the AC outlet.

IMPORTANT

Please record the serial number of this unit in the space

below.

MODEL:

Serial No.:

The serial number is located on the rear of the unit.

Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future

reference.

WARNING

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK,

DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS

To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide

slot and fully insert.

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian

ICES-003.

01RX-V595a-e/f1 6/24/99, 11:42 AM6

English

FEATURES OF THE SOUND EFFECTS

Welcome to the exciting world of digital home entertainment.

This unit is one of the most complete and advanced AV

receivers available. Some of the more advanced features may

not be familiar to you, but they are easy to use. State-of-the-art

technologies such as Dolby Digital and Digital Theater Systems

(DTS) may be new to your home, but you have probably

experienced the amazing realism they bring to feature films in

theaters around the world.

To make the listening experience even more enjoyable, this unit

includes a number of exclusive, digitally created listening

environments known as digital sound fields. Choosing a sound

field program is like transporting yourself to such venues as an

outdoor arena, a European church, or a cozy jazz club. Take

some time now to read more about these features and enjoy

the new experiences this unit brings to your home theater.

Digital Sound Field Processing

What is it that makes live music so good? Today’s advanced

sound reproduction technology lets you get extremely close to

the sound of a live performance, but the chances are that you’ll

still notice something missing — the acoustic environment of

the live concert hall. Extensive research into the exact nature

of the sonic reflections that create the ambience of a large hall

has made it possible for YAMAHA engineers to bring you this

same sound to your listening room, so you’ll feel all the sound

of a live concert.

Furthermore, our technicians, armed with sophisticated

measuring equipment, have even made it possible to capture

the acoustics of a variety of actual concert halls, theaters, etc.

from around the world, to allow you to accurately re-create any

one of these live performance environments, all in your own

home.

Dolby Surround has been used in movie theaters since the mid-

seventies. It has also been available in home entertainment

systems since the late eighties and continues to be a popular

format for home theater systems. It uses four discrete channels

and five speakers to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound

effects: two main channels (left and right), a center channel for

dialog, and a rear channel for special sound effects. The rear

channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range.

Most video tapes and laser discs include Dolby Surround

encoding, as do many TV and cable broadcasts. The Dolby Pro

Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal

processing system that stabilizes each channel for even more

accurate sound positioning than is available with standard

analog processors.

Introduction

Dolby Pro Logic

01RX-V595a-e/f1 6/24/99, 11:42 AM7

Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is the next level of the Dolby Surround sound

system that was developed for 35 mm-film movies by

employing low bit-rate audio coding.

Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that provides

completely independent multi-channel audio to you. Dolby

Digital provides five full-range channels in what is sometimes

referred to as a “3/2” configuration: three front channels (left,

center and right), and two surround channels. A sixth bass-only

effect channel is also provided for output of LFE (low frequency

effect), or low bass effects that are independent of other

channels. (This is called the “LFE channel”.) This channel is

counted as 0.1, thus giving rise to the term 5.1 channels in

total.

Compared to Dolby Surround, which is referred to a “3/1”

system (left front, center, right front and just one surround

channel), Dolby Digital features two surround channels, called

stereo or split surrounds, each offering the same full-range

fidelity as the three front channels.

By using the built-in Dolby Digital decoder, you can experience

the dramatic realism and impact of Dolby Digital theater sound

in your home.

The wide dynamic range of sound reproduced by the five full-

range channels and precise sound orientation by digital sound

processing provides listeners with excitement and realism that

have never been experienced before.

Dolby Digital forms 5.1 channels as already mentioned, but it

can also form fewer channels, for example 2-channel stereo

and monaural. You may be able to find some 2-channel stereo

and/or monaural sources encoded with Dolby Digital in the

market.

Laser disc and DVD are home audio/video program sources

that could benefit from Dolby Digital. In the near future, Dolby

Digital will also be applied to DBS, CATV and HDTV. The

ongoing release of Dolby Digital theatrical films now underway

will provide an immediate source of Dolby Digital encoded

video software.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”,

“Pro Logic” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby

Laboratories.

DTS Digital Surround

DTS (Digital Theater Systems) was developed to replace

analog soundtracks of movies with six discrete channels of

digital soundtracks, and it is now installed in many theaters

around the world. The DTS digital playback system changed

the way we experienced movies in theaters with six discrete

channels of superb digital audio.

DTS technology, through intense research and development

has made it possible to deliver similar encode/decode discrete

technology to home audio surround-sound entertainment.

DTS Digital Surround is an encode/decode system which

delivers six channels of master-quality, 20-bit audio; technically,

it is 5.1 channels, which means 5 full-range (left, center, right

and two surround) channels, plus a subwoofer (LFE) channel

(as “0.1”). It is compatible with the 5.1 speaker configurations

that are currently available for home theater systems.

The DTS Digital Surround algorithm is designed to encode the

six channels of 20-bit audio on to some laser discs, compact

discs and DVDs with considerably less data compression.

By using the DTS decoder built into this unit, you can

experience the dramatic realism and impact of the DTS-

installed theater’s high quality sound in your home.

Laser disc, compact disc and DVD are home audio formats by

which DTS can present its high-quality multi-channel audio. (In

addition to movies on laser discs, many exciting new multi-

channel music recordings will also become available in the

form of DTS-encoded compact discs.)

Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc.

US Pat. No. 5,451,942 and other world-wide patents issued

and pending. “DTS”, “DTS Digital Surround”, are trademarks of

01RX-V595a-e/f1 6/24/99, 11:42 AM8

English

CINEMA DSP: Dolby Surround + DSP / DTS + DSP

The Dolby Surround sound and DTS systems show their full

ability in a large movie theater, because movie sounds are

originally designed to be reproduced in a large movie theater

that uses a multitude of speakers. Trying to create a sound

environment similar to that of a movie theater in your home is

difficult because of the room size, material inside the walls, the

number of speakers, and so on. In other words, your listening

room is very different from a movie theater.

However, YAMAHA DSP technology allows you to create nearly

the same sound experience as that of a large movie theater in

your home by compensating for the lack of presence and

dynamics in the listening room with original digital sound fields

combined with Dolby Surround or DTS Digital Surround

sounds.

The YAMAHA “CINEMA DSP” logo indicates those programs

that are created by the combination of YAMAHA DSP

technology and Dolby Surround or DTS.

Dolby Pro Logic + 2 Digital Sound Fields

Digital sound fields are created on the presence side and the

rear surround side of the Dolby Pro Logic-decoded sound

field, respectively. They create a wide acoustic environment

and emphasize the surround effect in the room, letting you

feel as much presence as if you were watching a movie in a

popular Dolby Stereo theater.

Refer to pages 36 to 37 for the DSP program.

CINEMA DSP

Dolby Digital or DTS + 3 Digital Sound Fields

Digital sound fields are created on the presence side and the

independent left and right surround sides of the Dolby Digital-

decoded or DTS-decoded sound field, respectively. They

create a wide acoustic environment and strong surround

effect in the room without losing high-channel separation. With

the wide dynamic range of Dolby Digital or DTS sound, this

sound field combination lets you feel as if you were watching

a movie in the newest Dolby Digital theater or DTS-installed

theater. This is the most ideal home theater sound at the

present time.

Refer to pages 36 to 37 for the DSP program.

01RX-V595a-e/f1 6/24/99, 11:42 AM9

STANDBY/ON

TAPE/MD MON

/EXT. DECODER

–dB

BALANCETREBLEBASS

VIDEO AUX

PHONES

SPEAKERS

ON OFF

PROGRAM

INPUT

VCR • V

–

AUX • TV

DBS • DVD

LD • CD • TUNER • PHONO

VOLUME

8 VIDEO VIDEO

AUDIO R

E1 2

678

TUNING

MODE

MEMORY EDIT

FM/AM

DOWN

TUNING

INPUT MODE

5 RL 5

TIME/

LEVEL

SET

EFFECT

MAN’L

AUTO FM AUTO

MAN’L MONO

CONTROLS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS

FRONT PANEL

STANDBY/ON

Press this switch to turn on the power of this unit. Press it

again to set this unit in the standby mode.

Standby mode

In this state, this unit consumes a very small quantity of

power to receive infrared-signals from the remote control.

2 Remote control sensor

This receives signals from the remote control.

3 Display

This shows various information. (Refer to page 12 for details.)

4 MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)

Press this button to store the broadcasting stations.

When this button is pressed and held for more than three

seconds, automatic preset tuning begins.

5 EDIT

This button is used to exchange the assigment of two preset

stations with each other.

6 TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)

Press this button to switch the tuning mode to automatic or

manual. To select the automatic tuning mode, press this button

so that the “AUTO TUNING” indicator lights up on the display.

To select the manual tuning mode, press this button so that the

“AUTO TUNING” indicator goes off.

7 FM/AM

Press this button to switch the reception band between FM and

AM.

8 TUNING UP/DOWN

This button is used for tuning. Press the UP side to tune in to

higher frequencies, and press the DOWN side to tune in to

lower frequencies.

9 TAPE/MD MON / EXT. DECODER

Press this button to play a tape or an MD. The “TAPE/MD

MON” indicator lights up on the display.

When you press the button next, the “TAPE/MD MON” indicator

goes off, “EXT. DECDR” appears on the display and you can

play the signal connected to the EXTERNAL DECODER

INPUT terminals.

0 INPUT

Turn this selector to select the input source (VCR, VIDEO AUX,

TV/DBS, DVD/LD, CD, TUNER, PHONO) that you want to

listen to or watch.

The name of the selected input source appears on the display.

Refer to pages 43 to 48 for the remote control.

01RX-V595a-e/f1 6/24/99, 11:42 AM10

English

q INPUT MODE

This button switches between the DVD/LD and TV/DBS input

signal modes.

w VOLUME

This control is used to raise or lower the volume level.

e PHONES jack

When you use headphones, connect the headphones to the

PHONES jack. You can listen to the sound to be output from

the main speakers through the headphones.

When using headphones only, set both SPEAKERS A and B to

the OFF position and switch off the digital sound field processor

(so that no DSP program name appears on the display) by

pressing EFFECT.

r SPEAKERS

Set A or B (or both A and B) to the ON position for the main

speaker system (connected to this unit) that you want to use.

Set the button(s) for the main speaker system you don’t want to

use to the OFF position.

t A/B/C/D/E

Press this button to select one of a group (A to E) of preset

stations.

y Preset station number selector

Each of these buttons selects a preset station number (1 to 8).

u Tone controls

These controls are only effective for the sound from the main

speakers.

BASS

Use this control to increase or decrease the low-frequency

response. The “0” position produces a flat response.

TREBLE

Use this control to increase or decrease the high-frequency

response. The “0” position produces a flat response.

i BALANCE

This control is only effective for the sound from the main

speakers.

Turn the control to adjust the balance of the output volume to

the left and right speakers to compensate for sound imbalance

caused by the speaker location or listening room conditions.

o TIME/LEVEL

Press this button to select the item in the TIME/LEVEL mode.

p +/–

These buttons are used to adjust the settings of the SET MENU

mode and the TIME/LEVEL mode. In the TIME/LEVEL mode,

press + to increase the delay time or speaker output level.

Press – to decrease the delay time or speaker output level.

a SET MENU

Press this button to select functions in the SET MENU mode.

s PROGRAM selector

Press

or to select a DSP program.

The name of the selected program appears on the display.

d EFFECT

Press this button once to switch the effect speakers (center and

rear) on or off. If you turn off the effect by using EFFECT, all

Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are directed to the main

left and right channels. In that case, the left and right channel

signal levels may not match.

f VIDEO AUX terminals

Connect an auxiliary video or audio input source such as a

camcorder to these terminals. If the connected video unit has

an S video output terminal, connect it to the S VIDEO terminal

to obtain a high-resolution picture. The source connected to

these terminals can be selected by INPUT.

01RX-V595a-e/f1 6/24/99, 11:42 AM11

1 Multi-information display

This displays various information, for example the station

frequency, preset station number and name of the selected

input source.

2 MEMORY indicator

When MEMORY is pressed, this indicator flashes for about five

seconds. During this period, the displayed station can be

stored in the memory.

3 AUTO TUNING indicator

This lights up when the unit is in the automatic tuning mode.

4 TAPE/MD MON indicator

This lights up when the tape deck (or MD recorder, etc.) is

selected as the input source by pressing TAPE/MD MON / EXT.

DECODER on the front panel or TAPE/MD on the remote control.

5 STEREO indicator

This lights up when an FM stereo broadcast with sufficient

signal strength is being received.

6 Signal-level indicator

This indicates the signal level of the station being received.

If multipath interference is detected, the indication decreases.

DISPLAY PANEL

indicators

Either “dts” indicator lights up when the built-in DTS decoder is

turned on.

The red “dts” indicator lights up when playing a CD or LD

encoded with DTS.

The orange “dts” indicator lights up when playing a DVD

encoded with DTS.

* An orange “dts” indicator may light up when playing a CD or

LD encoded with DTS after playing a video-CD or DVD on a

DVD/LD combi-player.

8 , and indicators

“

” lights up when the built-in Dolby Digital decoder is

on and the signals of the selected source encoded with Dolby

Digital are not in 2-channel. “ ” lights up when the built-in

digital sound field processor is on, and “

” lights up

when the built-in Dolby Pro Logic decoder is on. Depending on

the selected DSP program, both “

” and “ ”, or

both “

” and “ ” will light up.

9 SLEEP indicator

This lights up while the built-in SLEEP timer is functioning.

01RX-V595a-e/f1 6/24/99, 11:42 AM12

English

SPEAKER SETUP

This unit is designed to provide the best sound-field quality with

a 5-speaker configuration, using main speakers, rear speakers

and a center speaker.

The main speakers are used for the main source sound plus

the effect sounds. They will probably be the speakers from

your present stereo system. The rear speakers are used for

the effect and surround sounds, and the center speaker is for

the center sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is

not practical to use a center speaker, you can do without it.

Best results, however, are obtained with the full system.

The main speakers should be high-performance models and

have enough power-handling capacity to accept the maximum

output of your audio system.

The other speakers do not have to be equal to the main

speakers. For precise sound localization, however, it is ideal to

use high-performance models that can reproduce sounds over

the full range for the center speaker and the rear speakers.

Use of a subwoofer expands your sound field

It is also possible to further expand your system with the

addition of a subwoofer. The use of a subwoofer is effective

not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all

channels, but also for reproducing the LFE (low frequency

effect) sound with high fidelity when playing back a source that

is Dolby Digital or DTS-decoded. The YAMAHA Active Servo

Processing Subwoofer System is ideal for natural and lively

bass reproduction.

SPEAKERS TO BE USED

SPEAKER PLACEMENT

Refer to the following diagram when you place the speakers.

Main: The position of your present stereo speaker

system.

Rear: Behind your listening position, facing slightly

inward. Nearly 1.8 m (approx. 6 feet) up from the

floor.

Center: Precisely between the main speakers. (To avoid

interference with TV sets, use a magnetically

shielded speaker.)

Subwoofer: The position of the subwoofer is not as critical,

because low bass tones are not highly directional.

Rear

speaker (R)

Main

speaker (R)

Center speaker

Subwoofer

Main

speaker (L)

Rear

speaker

(L)

Note: If the center speaker (principally, it reproduces dialog, vocals, etc.) is not used, the sound will be output from the left and

right main speakers. In that case, be sure to select the NONE position for “CNTR” in the SET MENU mode. (See page 21

for details.)

01RX-V595a-e/f2 6/24/99, 11:42 AM13

AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED)

U.S.A., Canada and China models ....................... 2 OUTLETS

Australia model .........................................................1 OUTLET

Use these to connect the power cords from your components to

this unit.

The power to the AC OUTLET(S) is controlled by this unit’s

STANDBY/ON or the provided remote control’s POWER and

STANDBY. These outlets will supply power to any connected

component whenever this unit is turned on.

The maximum power (total power consumption of components)

that can be connected to the AC OUTLET(S) is 100 watts.

CONNECTIONS

Never plug in this unit and other components until all connections have been completed.

CONNECTIONS WITH OTHER COMPONENTS

Use RCA-type pin plug cables for connecting audio/video components with the exception described later.

When making connections between this unit and other components, be sure all connections are made correctly, that is to say L

(left) to L, R (right) to R, “+” to “+” and “–” to “–”. Also, refer to the owner’s manual for each component to be connected to this unit.

* If you have YAMAHA components numbered as !, #, $, etc. on the rear panel, connections can be made easily by making sure

to connect the output (or input) terminals of each component to the same-numbered terminals of this unit.

Turntable Monitor TV

DVD player,

LD player, etc.

CD player Tape deck,

MD recorder, etc.

TV/DBS tuner VCR

(Video cassette recorder)

To AC outlet

(U.S.A. model)

GND terminal (for turntable use)

Connecting the ground (earth) wire of the turntable to the GND terminal will normally minimize hum, but in some cases, better

results may be obtained with the ground wire disconnected.

01RX-V595a-e/f2 6/24/99, 11:42 AM14

English

CONNECTING TO DIGITAL (COAXIAL AND/OR OPTICAL) TERMINALS

If your DVD (LD) player, TV/DBS tuner, etc. are equipped with

coaxial or optical digital audio signal output terminals, they can

be connected to this unit’s COAXIAL and/or OPTICAL digital

signal input terminals.

Digital audio signals are transmitted with less loss than analog

audio signals. In addition, digital audio signal connections are

necessary, especially for an LD player or a DVD player, to send

signals encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS to this unit.

To make a connection between optical digital audio signal

terminals, remove the cover from each terminal, and then

connect them by using a commercially available optical fiber

cable that conforms to EIAJ standards. Other cables might not

function correctly.

Even if you connect an audio/video unit to the COAXIAL (or

OPTICAL) terminal of this unit, you must keep the unit

connected with the same-named analog audio signal terminals

of this unit, because a digital signal cannot be recorded by a

tape deck, MD recorder or VCR connected to this unit. You can

easily switch the selection of input signals between “digital” and

“analog.” (See page 28 for details.)

Notes

• When connecting an audio/video unit to both the digital and

analog terminals of this unit, make sure to connect between

both terminals of the same name.

• Be sure to attach the covers when the OPTICAL terminals

are not being used in order to protect them from dust.

• The input signal from the DVD/LD input terminals is selected

in the following order of priority with the input mode set to the

AUTO position:

1 COAXIAL terminal

2 OPTICAL terminal

3 Analog terminal

• If the DIGITAL OUT data of the player has been processed in

any way, you may not be able to perform DTS playback even

if you make a digital connection between this unit and the

player.

• All digital audio signal input terminals are applicable to

sampling frequencies of 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz and 48 kHz.

No sound will be generated when connecting your LD

player’s Dolby Digital RF signal output terminal directly to

this unit’s COAXIAL DVD/LD digital signal input terminal.

DVD or LD player*

* If your LD player has a Dolby Digital RF signal

output terminal, be sure to use the RF

demodulator (separately purchased).

TV/DBS tuner

(U.S.A. model)

01RX-V595a-e/f2 6/24/99, 11:42 AM15

CONNECTING TO S VIDEO TERMINALS

If you have a VCR and a monitor equipped with “S” (high-

resolution) video terminals, those terminals can be connected

to this unit’s S VIDEO terminals. Connect the VCR’s “S” video

input and output terminals to this unit’s S VIDEO VCR OUT and

IN terminals, respectively, and connect the monitor’s “S” video

input terminal to this unit’s S VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminal.

Otherwise, connect the VCR’s composite video terminals to this

unit’s composite video terminals, and connect the monitor’s

composite video input terminal to this unit’s composite

MONITOR OUT terminal.

In addition, if you have a DVD or LD player equipped with an

“S” video terminal, connect the DVD/LD player’s “S” video

output terminal to this unit’s S VIDEO DVD/LD terminal.

Note

If video signals are sent to both S VIDEO input and com-

posite input terminals, the signals will be sent to their

respective output terminals.

S VIDEO terminals

This unit provides you with S VIDEO terminals in addition

to standard VIDEO terminals.

S VIDEO terminals transmit video signals separated into

luminance (Y) signals and color (C) signals. In comparison

with S VIDEO terminals, standard VIDEO terminals transmit

“composite” video signals.

Monitor TV

S S S

Camcorder

CONNECTING TO VIDEO AUX TERMINALS (ON THE FRONT PANEL)

These terminals are used to connect any video input source such as a camcorder to this unit.

DVD/LD player

S VIDEO cable

VCR

01RX-V595a-e/f2 6/24/99, 11:42 AM16

English

CONNECTING TO AN EXTERNAL DECODER

This unit is equipped with additional 6-channel audio signal

input terminals for inputting signals from an external decoder to

this unit.

Connect the 6-channel audio signal output terminals of the

decoder to the EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT terminals of this

unit.

Notes

• When signals input to these terminals are selected, the digital

sound field processor cannot be used.

• The settings of “CNTR”, “REAR”, “MAIN” and “BASS” in the

SET MENU mode have no effect on the signals input to these

terminals. The setting of “M.LVL” is effective. (Refer to

page 21 for details.)

• Adjustment of the output level of the center speakers, rear

speakers and subwoofer is effective when the signals input to

these terminals are selected as the input source. (Refer to

page 39 for details.)

External decoder with

6-channel discrete

outputs

(U.S.A. model)

WARNING

Do not change the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch setting

while the power to this unit is on, otherwise this unit may be

damaged.

If this unit fails to turn on when the STANDBY/ON switch is

pressed, the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch may not be

fully set to either end. If so, set the switch to either end fully

when this unit is in the standby mode.

Select the position whose requirements your speaker system

meets.

(Upper position)

Main: If you use one pair of main speakers, the impedance of

each speaker must be 4 Ω or higher.

If you use two pairs of main speakers, the impedance

of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher.

Center: The impedance of the speaker must be 6 Ω or higher.

Rear: The impedance of each speaker must be 6 Ω or

higher.

(Lower position)

Main: If you use one pair of main speakers, the impedance of

each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher.

If you use two pairs of main speakers, the impedance

of each speaker must be 16 Ω or higher.

The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or

higher.

Center: The impedance of the speaker must be 8 Ω or higher.

Rear: The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or

higher.

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR SWITCH

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

(U.S.A. model)

01RX-V595a-e/f2 6/24/99, 11:43 AM17

Note

Use speakers with the specified impedance shown on the

rear panel of this unit.

Main speaker connections

One or two speaker systems can be connected to this unit. If

you use only one speaker system, connect it to either of the

SPEAKERS A or B terminals.

Rear speaker connections

A rear speaker system can be connected to this unit. Place

them to the rear of your listening position.

Center speaker connection

A center speaker can be connected to this unit. Place it on or

under the TV.

Subwoofer connection

You may wish to add a subwoofer to reinforce low frequencies

or to output low bass sound from the subwoofer channel.

If you have a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, including the

YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, connect

the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT terminal of this unit to the input

terminal of the subwoofer system.

CONNECTING SPEAKERS

Rear speakers

Subwoofer system

Center speaker

Right

Left

Main speakers A Main speakers B

Right

Left

Right Left

(U.S.A. model)

01RX-V595a-e/f2 6/24/99, 11:43 AM18

English

How to connect

Connect the SPEAKERS terminals to your speakers with wire of the proper gauge, cut as short as possible. If the connections are

faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers. Make sure that the polarity of the speaker wires is correct, that is the + and –

markings are observed. If these wires are reversed, the sound will be unnatural and lack bass.

Caution

Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other and do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could

damage the unit and/or speakers.

Connecting to the MAIN SPEAKERS terminals

Red: positive (+)

Black: negative (–)

1 Unscrew the knob.

2 Remove approx. 5 mm

(1/4”) of insulation from

each of the speaker

wires and insert one

bare wire into each

terminal.

3 Tighten the knob to

secure the wire.

1 Press the tab.

2 Remove approx. 5 mm

(1/4”) of insulation from

each of the speaker

wires and insert one

bare wire into each

terminal.

3 Release the tab to

secure the wire.

Connecting to the REAR and CENTER

SPEAKERS terminals

Red: positive (+)

Black: negative (–)

Banana plug connections are also possible. Simply insert the

banana plug connector into the corresponding terminal.

01RX-V595a-e/f2 6/24/99, 11:43 AM19

Connecting the AM loop antenna

• The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit. The antenna may be hung on a wall.

• The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.

ANTENNA CONNECTIONS

Each antenna should be correctly connected to the designated terminals, referring to the following diagram.

Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this unit. In general, these antennas will probably provide sufficient signal

strength. Nevertheless, a properly installed outdoor antenna will give clearer reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor

reception quality, an outdoor antenna may result in improvement.

GND terminal

For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the

GND terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth ground

is a metal stake driven into moist earth.

2 Attach the loop antenna to the

antenna stand.

Outdoor

FM antenna

75-ohm/300-ohm

antenna adapter

75-ohm coaxial cable

75-ohm/300-ohm

antenna adapter

300-ohm feeder

Ground

AM loop

antenna

(included)

Outdoor AM antenna

* If you cannot obtain good

reception with the AM loop

antenna, connect 5 m to

10 m of vinyl covered wire

to the AM ANT terminal

and extend it outdoors

from a window. (Be sure

to also connect the AM

loop antenna at this time.)

Indoor FM antenna

(included)

* Firmly insert the

connector into the FM

ANT terminal.

Loop antenna

Antenna stand

* You may be unable to obtain good FM radio

reception depending on your local

conditions (distance from the broadcast

station, interposing buildings and

mountains, etc.). Consult your dealer or

authorized service center and be sure to

install an antenna that suits your local

conditions.

Install the special FM outdoor antenna in a

high place as far away from any roads as

possible to avoid being affected by

automobile ignition noise.

1 1 Press the tab and unlock the terminal hole.

2 Connect the AM loop antenna lead wires to the

AM ANT and GND terminals.

3 Return the tab to its original position to lock the

lead wires. Lightly pull the lead wires to confirm

a good connection.

3 Orient the AM loop

antenna so that the best

reception is obtained.

(U.S.A. model)

01RX-V595a-e/f2 6/24/99, 11:43 AM20

English

ADJUSTMENTS BEFORE USING THIS UNIT

SELECTING THE OUTPUT MODES

This unit provides you with the following five functions to determine the method of distributing output signals to speakers suitable for

your audio system. When speaker connections have all been completed, select the proper setting for each function to make the

best use of your speaker system. (See “ADJUSTMENTS IN THE ‘SET MENU’ MODE” on page 41.)

CNTR (CENTER SPEAKER)

2. REAR (REAR SPEAKERS) 3. MAIN (MAIN SPEAKERS)

4. BASS (LFE/BASS OUT) 5. M.LVL (MAIN LEVEL)

DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION

CNTR (CENTER SPEAKER)

Choices: LARGE/SMALL/NONE

Preset position: LARGE

LARGE: Select this position when your center speaker is

approximately the same size as the main speakers.

SMALL: Select this position when you use a center speaker

that is smaller than the main speakers.

In this position, low bass signals (below 90 Hz) on the

center channel are output from the main speakers (or

the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT terminal if the SMALL

position is selected for “MAIN” and the SW position is

selected for “BASS”).

NONE: Select this position when you do not have a center

speaker (four speaker system). The center channel

sound will be output from the left and right main

speakers.

REAR (REAR SPEAKERS)

Choices: LARGE/SMALL

Preset position: LARGE

LARGE: Select this position if your rear speakers have high

ability for bass reproduction, or if a subwoofer is

connected in parallel to the rear speaker.

In this position, full-range signals are output from the

rear speakers.

SMALL: Select this position if your rear speakers do not have

high ability for bass reproduction.

In this position, low bass signals (below 90 Hz) on

the rear channels are output from the SUBWOOFER

OUTPUT terminal (or the main speakers if the MAIN

position is selected for “BASS”).

MAIN (MAIN SPEAKERS)

Choices: LARGE/SMALL

Preset position: LARGE

LARGE: Select this position if your main speakers have high

ability for bass reproduction.

In this position, full-range signals present on the

main channels are output from the main speakers.

SMALL: Select this position if your main speakers do not

have high ability for bass reproduction. However, if

your system does not include a subwoofer, do not

select this position.

In this position, low bass signals (below 90 Hz) on

the main channels are output from the

SUBWOOFER OUTPUT terminal if the SW or BOTH

position is selected for “BASS”.

BASS (LFE/BASS OUT)

Choices: SW/MAIN/BOTH

Preset position: SW

MAIN: Select this position if your system does not include a

subwoofer.

In this position, full-range signals present on the

main channels, signals from the LFE channel and

other low bass signals that are distributed from other

channels are output from the main speakers.

SW/BOTH:

Select either the SW or BOTH position if your

system includes a subwoofer.

In either position, signals on the LFE channel and

other low bass signals that are distributed from other

channels are output from the SUBWOOFER

OUTPUT terminal.

When the LARGE position is selected for “MAIN”, in

the SW position, no signal is distributed from the

main channels to the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT

terminal; however, in the BOTH position, low bass

signals from the main channels are output to both

the main speakers and the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT

terminal.

M.LVL (MAIN LEVEL)

Choices: NRML (NORMAL)/–10 dB

Preset position: NRML (NORMAL)

NRML (NORMAL):

Normally select this position.

–10 dB: Select this position if the sound output from the main

speakers is too loud and cannot be balanced with

the sound output from the center and rear speakers.

In this position, the sound output from the main

speakers is attenuated.

Note

The settings of “CNTR”, “REAR”, “MAIN” and “BASS” have no

effect on the signals input to the EXTERNAL DECODER

INPUT terminals on the rear of this unit.

01RX-V595a-e/f2 6/24/99, 11:43 AM21

ADJUSTMENT METHOD

Adjustments should be made while watching the information on this unit’s display.

When adjusting with the remote control, set the

SELECTOR DIAL to the AMP/TUN or DSP position on the

remote control.

1 Turn the power on.

Front panel Remote control

2 Press SET MENU once or more to select the function

“CNTR” on the display.

Front panel Remote control

* After pressing SET MENU once on the remote control, you

can also select the function by pressing

. (Pressing

goes back one selection.)

1 2

3 Press + or – once or more to select the setting you

want.

Front panel Remote control

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to change the settings for

“REAR”, “MAIN”, “BASS” and/or “M.LVL” in the same

way.

01RX-V595a-e/f2 6/24/99, 11:43 AM22

English

SPEAKER BALANCE ADJUSTMENT

This procedure lets you adjust the sound output level balance between the main, center and rear speakers by using the built-in test

tone generator. When this adjustment is performed, the sound output level heard at the listening position will be the same from

each speaker. This is important for the best performance of the digital sound field processor, the Dolby Digital decoder, the Dolby

Pro Logic decoder and the DTS decoder.

The adjustment of each speaker output level should be done at your listening position with the remote control.

After completing the adjustment of the output level for each speaker, use VOLUME (

) on the remote control at your

listening position to check if the adjustments are satisfactory.

Set the SELECTOR DIAL to the AMP/TUN or DSP position

on the remote control.

1 Set VOLUME to the “ ” position.

Front panel

2 1

4,74

5,9

2 Turn the power on.

Front panel Remote control

3 Select the main speakers to be used.

Front panel

* If you use two main speaker systems, press both A and B.

01RX-V595a-e/f2 6/24/99, 11:43 AM23

6 Turn up the volume.

Remote control

You will hear a test tone (like pink noise) from each

speaker for about two seconds in following order: left main

speaker, center speaker, right main speaker, right rear

speaker and left rear speaker. The display changes as

shown below.

* If the function “CNTR” in the SET MENU mode is set to

the NONE position, you will hear the center channel test

tone from the left and right main speakers.

7 Adjust BALANCE so that the sound output level of the

left main speaker and the right main speaker is the

same.

Front panel

Main (L)

Center

Main (R)

Rear (R)

Rear (L)

4 Set BASS, TREBLE and BALANCE to the “0” position.

Front panel

5 Press TEST so that “TEST LEFT” appears on the

display.

Remote control

01RX-V595a-e/f2 6/24/99, 11:43 AM24

English

8 Adjust the sound output levels of the center speaker

and the rear speakers so that they become almost the

same as that of the main speakers.

Press TIME/LEVEL once or more to select the speaker

to be adjusted so that “CENTER”, “R SUR.” or “L SUR.”

appears on the display.

Remote control

* You cannot adjust the delay time while the test tone is

sounding even if “DELAY” appears on the display

after pressing TIME/LEVEL once or more.

Adjust the level.

* Pressing

raises and lowers the level.

* While adjusting, the test tone is heard from the

selected speaker.

Remote control

9 When the adjustment is finished, press TEST again to

stop the test tone.

Remote control

Notes

• Once you have completed these adjustments, you can only

adjust the overall sound level of your audio system by using

VOLUME (or VOLUME (

) on the remote control).

• If you use external power amplifiers, you may also use their

volume controls to achieve the proper balance.

• If the function “CNTR” in the SET MENU mode is set to the

NONE position, the sound output level of the center speaker

cannot be adjusted in step 8. The center sound is automati-

cally output from the left and right main speakers.

• If there is insufficient sound output from the center and rear

speakers, you may decrease the main speaker output level

by setting “M.LVL” to “–10 dB”.

01RX-V595a-e/f2 6/24/99, 11:43 AM25

BASIC OPERATION

TO PLAY A SOURCE

3 Select the desired input source by using INPUT.

(Turn on the monitor TV for video sources.)

Front panel Remote control

The name of the selected input source will appear on the

display.

To play a tape or an MD

Press TAPE/MD MON / EXT. DECODER

on the front panel or TAPE/MD on the

remote control so that the “TAPE/MD

MON” indicator lights up on the display.

To use a decoder connected to the EXTERNAL

DECODER INPUT terminals

Press TAPE/MD MON / EXT. DECODER once or more on

the front panel or EXT. DEC. on the remote control so that

“EXT. DECDR” appears on the display.

When using the remote control

• Set the SELECTOR DIAL to the AMP/TUN position on the

remote control.

• To operate the CD player, DVD/LD player, tape deck, MD

recorder, or other components with this remote control, set

the SELECTOR DIAL to the component to be used. (See

“SETUP CODES” on page 49.)

1 Set VOLUME to the “ ” position.

Front panel

2 Turn the power on.

Front panel Remote control

1,73

8 8

3,4

Front panel

01RX-V595a-e/f3 6/24/99, 11:43 AM26

English

7 Adjust the volume to the desired output level.

Front panel Remote control

8 If desired, adjust BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE, etc.

and use the digital sound field processor (see pages 36

to 37).

BASS: Turn this control clockwise to increase (or

counterclockwise to decrease) the low-

frequency response.

TREBLE: Turn this control clockwise to increase (or

counterclockwise to decrease) the high-

frequency response.

BALANCE: Adjust the balance of the output volume

from the left and right speakers to

compensate for any sound imbalance

caused by the speaker location or

listening room conditions.

Front panel

* These controls are only effective for the sound from the

main speakers.

Front panel Remote control

When you have finished using this unit

Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel again or STANDBY on

the remote control to set this unit in the standby mode.

4 For a DVD/LD or TV/DBS source, the current input

mode is also shown.

* To change the input mode for the DVD/LD or TV/DBS

source, press INPUT MODE (or the button that you

have pressed to select the input source in step 3 on

the remote control) once or more until the desired

input mode is shown on the display. (See page 28 for

details on switching the input mode.)

Front panel Remote control

Input mode

5 Select the main speakers to be used.

Front panel

* If you use two main speaker systems, press both A and B.

6 Play the source. (See page 30 for detailed information

on tuning.)

01RX-V595a-e/f3 6/24/99, 11:44 AM27

Notes on using INPUT

• The audio source selected by INPUT will not be played if the

“TAPE/MD MON” indicator lights up or if “EXT. DECDR” is

displayed.

• If you select a video source by INPUT without canceling the

selection of TAPE/MD MON / EXT. DECODER on the front

panel (or TAPE/MD or EXT. DEC. on the remote control), the

play back result will be a video image from the video source

and the sound from the audio source selected by TAPE/MD

MON / EXT. DECODER on the front panel (or TAPE/MD or

EXT. DEC. on the remote control).

• If an audio source is selected by INPUT while watching a

video source, the selected audio source will be played, but

the video image will not be interrupted.

• When you select an input source by INPUT, the DSP

program (or no DSP program) that was being used when the

same input source was selected the last time will be auto-

matically recalled.

• If “DATA ERR” appears on the display while playing a CD or

LD encoded with DTS, stop playback and turn the player off

and then on again.

Switching the input mode

(for DVD/LD and TV/DBS)

This unit allows you to switch the input mode for sources that

send two or more types of signal to this unit.

The following three input modes are provided.

AUTO

This mode is automatically selected when you turn on the

power of this unit.

In this mode, the input signal is automatically selected in the

following order of priority:

1. Digital signal encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS, or normal

digital input signal (PCM)

2. Analog input signal (ANALOG)

* For a DVD/LD source, if digital signals are input from both the

OPTICAL and COAXIAL terminals, the digital signal from the

COAXIAL terminal is selected.

DTS

In this mode, only a digital input signal encoded with DTS is

selected, even though other signals are input at the same time.

ANALOG

In this mode, only an analog input signal is selected, even

though digital signals are input at the same time.

Select this mode when you want to use an analog input signal

instead of digital input signals.

Notes on input mode selection

• The input mode for a TV/DBS source is selected with the

function “INPUT” in the SET MENU mode. (See page 42 for

details.)

• Set the input mode to AUTO to play a DVD/LD source

encoded with Dolby Digital.

• Set the input mode to ANALOG to play a normal 2-channel

source with a Dolby Surround program.

• The sound output may be interrupted in some LD and DVD

players in the following situation:

The input mode is set to AUTO. A search is made while

playing the disc encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS, and then

disc playing is restored. The sound output is interrupted for a

moment because the digital input signal was selected again.

• The input mode cannot be changed for the PHONO, TUNER,

TAPE/MD, CD, VCR and VIDEO AUX sources because only

analog signals are used.

• The present input mode appears on the display when the

input source is changed to DVD/LD or TV/DBS, or the input

mode is changed.

Notes on playing a source encoded with DTS

If you play a CD or LD encoded with DTS while the AUTO

mode is selected, there will be a short noise at first while the

unit identifies the DTS signal and activates the DTS decoder.

This is not a malfunction, and can be avoided by setting the

input mode to DTS beforehand. In addition, If you continue

to play a CD or LD encoded with DTS with the input mode

setting left at AUTO, this unit automatically switches to the

“DTS-decoding” mode to prevent noise from being gener-

ated during future operation. (The red “dts” indicator lights

up on the display.)

No sound will be heard if a normal PCM CD or LD is played

in this mode. (The red “dts” indicator will flash.) To play a

normal disk, return the input mode from DTS to AUTO.

01RX-V595a-e/f3 6/24/99, 11:44 AM28

English

TO RECORD A SOURCE ON TAPE, MD OR VIDEO CASSETTE

4 21

1 Select the source to be recorded.

Front panel Remote control

2 Play the source and then turn up the volume to confirm

the input source. (See page 30 for detailed information

on tuning.)

Front panel Remote control

3 Begin recording on the tape deck, MD recorder or VCR

connected to this unit.

4 When a tape deck or MD recorder is being used for

recording, you can monitor the sounds being recorded

by pressing TAPE/MD MON / EXT. DECODER on the

front panel or TAPE/MD on the remote control so that

the “TAPE/MD MON” indicator lights up on the display.

Front panel Remote control

Notes

• The settings of DSP and VOLUME, BASS, TREBLE and

BALANCE have no effect on the material being recorded.

• Composite video and S video signals pass independently

through this unit’s video circuits. Therefore, when recording

or dubbing video signals, if your video source unit is con-

nected to provide only an S video (or only a composite video)

signal, you can record only an S video (or only a composite

video) signal on your VCR.

• A source that is connected to this unit only through the digital

terminals cannot be recorded on a tape deck, MD recorder or

VCR connected to this unit.

• A source of signals input to the EXTERNAL DECODER

INPUT terminals of this unit cannot be recorded.

• Please check the copyright laws in your country to record

from records, compact discs, radio, etc. Recording of

If you watch video software that uses scrambled or encoded

signals to prevent it from being dubbed, there may be a case

that the picture itself will be affected by those signals.

01RX-V595a-e/f3 6/24/99, 11:44 AM29

AUTOMATIC TUNING

TUNING

Quick automatic-search tuning (AUTOMATIC TUNING) is effective when station signals are strong and there is no interference.

However, if the signal from the station you want to select is weak, you must tune in to it manually (MANUAL TUNING).

MANUAL TUNING

Check that the “AUTO

TUNING” indicator goes off.

Set the SELECTOR DIAL to the AMP/TUN position on the remote control and select TUNER as the input source.

1 Select the reception band (FM or AM) and confirm it on

the display.

Front panel

2 Press TUNING MODE so that the “AUTO TUNING”

indicator lights up on the display.

Front panel

Lights up

3 To tune in to a higher frequency, press the UP side of

TUNING once.

To tune in to a lower frequency, press the DOWN side

of TUNING once.

Front panel

* If the station where the tuning search stops is not the

desired one, press once more.

* If the tuning search does not stop at the desired station

(because the signal from the station is weak), take the

manual tuning procedure.

1 Select the reception band (FM or AM) and confirm it on

the display.

Front panel

2 Press TUNING MODE.

Front panel

3 Tune in manually to the desired station.

Front panel

* To continue the tuning search, press and hold the button.

Notes

• If you tune in manually to an FM station, it will be automati-

cally received in monaural mode to increase the signal

quality.

• When tuned in to a station, the frequency of the received

station is shown on the display.

01RX-V595a-e/f3 6/24/99, 11:44 AM30

English

MANUAL PRESET TUNING

This unit can store station frequencies to be selected by tuning. With this function, you can recall any desired station simply by

selecting the preset station number with which it was stored. Up to 40 stations (8 stations x 5 groups) can be stored.

4 Select the preset station number with which you want to

store the station before the “MEMORY” indicator goes

off from the display.

Front panel

The displayed station has been stored as A1.

* In the same way, store other stations as A2, A3 ... A8.

* You can store more stations as preset station numbers in

other groups in the same way by selecting another group

in step 2.

To store stations

1 Tune in to the desired station.

(See page 30 for the tuning procedure.)

2 Press A/B/C/D/E once or more to select the desired

group (A to E) of preset stations and confirm it on the

display.

Front panel

3 Press MEMORY so that the “MEMORY” indicator

flashes for about five seconds.

Front panel

Flashes

2 4

01RX-V595a-e/f3 6/24/99, 11:44 AM31

To recall a preset station

1 Select the group of preset stations.

Front panel Remote control

2 Select the preset station number.

Front panel Remote control

Notes

• A new setting can be stored in place of the former one.

• For presets, the setting of the reception mode (stereo or

monaural) is stored along with the station frequency.

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from

being lost when this unit is set in the standby mode. If,

however, the power plug is disconnected from the AC outlet or

the power is cut due to temporary power failure for more than

one week, the memory will be erased. If so, it can be re-stored

by simply following the preset tuning procedure.

1 2

01RX-V595a-e/f3 6/24/99, 11:44 AM32

English

To store stations

1 Select the FM band.

Front panel

2 Press TUNING MODE so that the “AUTO TUNING”

indicator lights up on the display.

Front panel

Lights up

3 Press MEMORY and hold for about three seconds.

Front panel

Flashes

AUTOMATIC PRESET TUNING (for FM stations only)

You can also make use of the automatic preset tuning function for FM stations only. This function enables the unit to perform

automatic tuning and to sequentially store FM stations with strong signals. Up to 40 stations can be stored automatically in the

same way as that for manual preset tuning on page 31. Note that a new setting can be stored in place of the former one.

4 To tune in to higher frequencies, press the UP side of

TUNING once.

To tune in to lower frequencies, press the DOWN side

of TUNING once.

Front panel

* If TUNING is not pressed, automatic preset tuning soon

begins automatically toward the higher frequencies.

Automatic preset tuning begins from the frequency currently

displayed. Received stations are sequentially stored as A1,

A2 ... A8.

* If more than 8 stations are received, they are stored as

preset station numbers in other groups (B, C, D and E) in

that order.

If you want to store the first station received by automatic

preset tuning as a desired preset station number

For example, if you want to store the first received station as C5,

select “C5” while “A1”, the “MEMORY” indicator and the “AUTO

TUNING” indicator flash after pressing MEMORY in step 3. Then

press TUNING. The first received station is stored as C5, and the

next stations as sequentially C6, C7 ... .

If stations have all been stored up to E8, automatic preset tuning

stops automatically.

When automatic preset tuning is completed

The display shows the frequency of the last preset station.

Check the contents and the number of preset stations by

following the procedure in the section “To recall a preset

station” on page 32.

01RX-V595a-e/f3 6/24/99, 11:44 AM33

EXCHANGING PRESET STATIONS

You can exchange the assignment of two preset stations with each other as shown below.

3 Next, recall preset station “A5” by following the same

procedure as that in step 1.

Flashes

4 Press EDIT once more.

Front Panel

Shows the exchange of

stations has been completed.

Notes

• You can manually replace a preset station with another FM or AM station by simply following the procedure in the section “To

store stations” on page 31.

• Even if the number of received stations is not enough to be stored up to E8, the search is automatically ended after searching all

frequencies.

• With this function, only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are automatically stored. If the station you want to store is weak

in signal strength, tune in to it manually in monaural sound and store it by following the procedure in the section “To store sta-

tions” on page 31.

1 Recall preset station “E1” by following the procedure in

the section “To recall a preset station” on page 32.

2 Press EDIT.

Front Panel

Flashes

2,4

Example

If you want to change the preset station from “E1” to “A5”, or vice versa.

01RX-V595a-e/f3 6/24/99, 11:44 AM34

English

SETTING THE SLEEP TIMER

The SLEEP timer can be used to make this unit automatically switch to the standby mode. When you are going to sleep while

enjoying a broadcast or other desired input source, this timer function is useful. The SLEEP timer can only be controlled with the

remote control.

Notes

• To set the SLEEP timer for this unit, set the SELECTOR DIAL to a position other than the TV position. To set the SLEEP timer for

your TV, set the SELECTOR DIAL to the TV position.

• The components for which the SLEEP timer is effective are the sources connected to the AC OUTLET(S) on the rear panel of

this unit.

To set the SLEEP time

1 Play the source which you want to enjoy when you are

going to sleep and press SLEEP once or more to select

the desired SLEEP time.

Remote control

The SLEEP time is displayed.

Flashes

Each time you press SLEEP, the SLEEP time will change as

follows:

(Minutes)

120 90 60 30

The SLEEP timer is off (SLEEP OFF).

(This is the state before SLEEP is

pressed.)

The “SLEEP” indicator soon lights up and the display returns

to the indication before the SLEEP timer was set.

2 The unit will be switched to the standby mode automati-

cally at the selected SLEEP time.

To cancel the selected SLEEP time

Remote control

Press SLEEP once or more so that “SLEEP OFF” appears on

the display. (It will soon disappear and the “SLEEP” indicator

will go off from the display.)

Note

The SLEEP timer setting can also be canceled by setting the

unit in the standby mode with STANDBY/ON on the front panel

(or STANDBY on the remote control) or by disconnecting the

power plug of the unit from the AC outlet.

01RX-V595a-e/f3 6/24/99, 11:44 AM35

No. PROGRAM

1 Normal Program

[1] DOLBY PRO LOGIC (

)

• Input source : Dolby Surround

2-ch Dolby Digital

• Output channel : 4 channels

• DSP : —

[2] DOLBY DIGITAL (

)

• Input source : Dolby Digital

• Output channel : 5.1 channels

• DSP : —

[3] DTS (

)

• Input source : DTS

• Output channel : 5.1 channels

• DSP : —

2 Enhanced Program

[1] DOLBY PRO LOGIC/Enhanced (

)

• Input source : Dolby Surround

2-ch Dolby Digital

• Output channel : 4 channels

• DSP : 1 (surround)

[2] DOLBY DIGITAL/Enhanced (

)

• Input source : Dolby Digital

• Output channel : 5.1 channels

• DSP : 2 (surround L, R)

[3] DTS/Enhanced (

)

• Input source : DTS

• Output channel : 5.1 channels

• DSP : 2 (surround L, R)

FEATURES

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM

This unit incorporates a sophisticated, multi-program digital sound field processor. This processor allows you to electronically

expand and change the shape of the audio sound field from both audio and video sources, creating a theater-like experience in

your listening room. You can create outstanding audio sound by selecting a suitable sound field program (this will, of course,

depend on what you are listening to) and adding any desired adjustments.

The operation of built-in decoders (Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS) can be controlled by selecting a corresponding DSP

program incorporating the combined operation of YAMAHA DSP and Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS.

The following list gives you a brief description of the sound fields produced by each of the DSP programs. Keep in mind that most

of these are precise digital re-creations of actual acoustic environments.

The built-in Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital or DTS

decoder precisely reproduces the sound and effect of

the encoded source.

The realization of a highly efficient decoding process

improves cross talk and channel separation and makes

sound positioning smoother and more precise.

This program ideally simulates the multi-surround

speaker systems of the 35 mm-film movie theater. Each

decoding and digital sound field processing operation is

precisely performed without altering the original sound

orientation.

The surround effect produced by the sound field folds

around the viewer naturally from the rear to the left and

right and toward the screen.

For movie or audio/video sources

01RX-V595a-e/f4 6/24/99, 11:45 AM36

English

No. PROGRAM

3 CINEMA DSP Program

[1] 70 mm MOVIE THEATER (

)

• Input source : Dolby Surround

2-ch Dolby Digital

• Output channel : 3 channels

• DSP : 2 (presence & surround)

[2] 70 mm MOVIE THEATER – DOLBY D. (

)

• Input source : Dolby Digital

• Output channel : 5.1 channels

• DSP : 3 (presence & surround L, R)

[3] 70 mm MOVIE THEATER – DTS (

)

• Input source : DTS

• Output channel : 5.1 channels

• DSP : 3 (presence & surround L, R)

4 MONO MOVIE

• Input source : Monaural

• Output channel : 1

• DSP : 1

5 TV SPORTS

• Input source : Audio/Video

• Output channel : 2 to 5.1 channels

• DSP : 2 to 3 (presence & surround)

FEATURES

Creates the extremely wide sound field of a movie

theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound in

detail, giving both the video and the sound field

incredible reality. Any kind of video source encoded

with Dolby Digital or DTS (especially large-scale movie

productions) is ideal for use with this program.

This program is designed specifically to enhance

monaural sources. Compared to a strictly mono setting,

the sound image is wider and slightly forward of the

speaker pair, lending an immediacy to the overall

sound.

This program is furnished with a tight sound field in

which the sound will not spread excessively at the front,

but the rear surround produces dynamic sound

expansion.

No. PROGRAM

6 Hi-Fi DSP Program

• Input source : 2-ch PCM/Analog audio

• Output channel : 2 channels

• DSP : 1

[1] DISCO

[2] ROCK CONCERT

[3] CONCERT HALL

For Hi-Fi Audio sources

Simulates the acoustics of disco in the heart of a lively

city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated.

Ideally suited for rock music. You will experience a

dynamic and lively sound field.

Creates the expansive ambience of a large concert hall.

Orchestra and opera music are suited to this program.

FEATURES

01RX-V595a-e/f4 6/24/99, 11:45 AM37

PLAYING A SOURCE WITH THE DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSOR (DSP)

EFFECT

Follow steps 1 to 7 shown in “TO PLAY A SOURCE” on

pages 26 to 27.

Select the desired DSP program that is suitable for the source.

Front panel Remote control

Press DSP. While the indicator is lit up for about

three seconds, select a DSP program with the

numeric buttons (1 to 8).

* If the SELECTOR DIAL is set to the DSP position, you can

also select a DSP program directly with the numeric

buttons (1 to 8).

The name of the selected program appears

on the display.

If desired, adjust the delay time and the output level of each

speaker. (See pages 39 and 40 for details.)

The following indicators on the display show you what sound

processing is being undertaken.

12 3 4 5

1 This lights up in orange when a DVD source encoded with

DTS is played back and DTS is decoded.

2 This lights up in red when an LD source or a CD source

encoded with DTS is played back and DTS is decoded.

3 This lights up when Dolby Digital is being decoded and the

signals of the selected source encoded with Dolby Digital is

not in 2-channel.

4 This lights up when the digital sound field processor is

turned on.

5 This lights up when Dolby Surround is being decoded by

Dolby Pro Logic.

TO CANCEL THE SOUND EFFECT

To cancel the sound effect and monitor only the main sound,

press EFFECT or EFCT ON/OFF. Press EFFECT or EFCT

ON/OFF once more to turn sound effect back on.

Front panel Remote control

Notes

• You can select a program for each of the input sources.

Once you select a program, it is linked with the input source

selected at that time. So, when you select the input source

next time, the same program is automatically called up.

• When a monaural sound source is being played with DOLBY

PRO LOGIC or DOLBY PRO LOGIC ENHANCED, no sound

will be heard from the main speakers and the rear speakers.

Sound can only be heard from the center speaker. However,

if the NONE position is selected for “CNTR” in the SET

MENU mode, the main speakers will output the sound of the

center channel.

• When the source of signals input to the EXTERNAL

DECODER INPUT terminals of this unit is selected, DSP

cannot be used.

• If the sound effect is canceled when signals encoded with

Dolby Digital or DTS are input to this unit, the signals of all

channels are mixed and are output from the main speakers.

• If EFFECT or EFCT ON/OFF is pressed to turn the sound

effects off when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoded, it may

happen that the sound is output faintly or not output normally,

depending on the source. In that case, press EFFECT or

EFCT ON/OFF to turn on the sound effects.

If you change the LD (or CD) being played back with DTS

being decoded to another disc that is not encoded with DTS

when the red “dts” indicator lights up, playing back the newly

selected disc will result in no sound output. In this state, the

red “dts” indicator flashes to show that this unit is locked in

the DTS-decoding mode.

To play back the disc normally, change the current DTS-

decoding mode to another mode by INPUT MODE on the

front panel or by INPUT on the remote control so that the red

“dts” indicator goes off.

01RX-V595a-e/f4 6/24/99, 11:45 AM38

English

2 Press + or – to adjust the settings for the delay time or

speaker output levels.

Front panel Remote control

3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to adjust the settings of any other

item.

ADJUSTING THE DELAY TIME AND SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS

When using the digital sound field processor with the Dolby Pro Logic decoder, the Dolby Digital decoder or the DTS decoder, you

can adjust the delay time between the main sound and sound effect, and each speaker’s output level as you prefer.

Adjustment method

When adjusting with the remote control, set the

SELECTOR DIAL to the AMP/TUN or DSP position on the

remote control.

1 Press TIME/LEVEL once or more until the name of the

item which you want to adjust appears on the display.

Front panel Remote control

* After pressing TIME/LEVEL once on the remote control,

you can also select the name of item by pressing

When pressed, the selection changes as follows:

DELAY

CENTER

R SUR.

L SUR.

SWFR

* Pressing on the remote control changes the selection in

the reverse order.

* Depending on the setting in the SET MENU mode, you

may not be able to select all these items.

Delay time

Center speaker output level

Right rear speaker output level

Left rear speaker output level

Subwoofer output level

01RX-V595a-e/f4 6/24/99, 11:45 AM39

Adjusting the delay time

You can adjust the time difference between the beginning of the

sound from the main speakers and the beginning of the sound

effect from the rear speakers.

The larger the value, the later the sound effect is generated.

This adjustment can be individually made to all programs.

Notes

• Adding too much delay will cause an unnatural effect with

some sources.

• When + or – is pressed, the sound is momentarily inter-

rupted.

Adjusting the output level of the center, right rear and left rear speakers, and subwoofer

Program

1. DOLBY PRO LOGIC

DOLBY DIGITAL

DTS

2. DOLBY PRO LOGIC/Enhanced

DOLBY DIGITAL/Enhanced

DTS/Enhanced

3. 70 mm MOVIE THEATER

70 mm MOVIE THEATER – DOLBY D.

70 mm MOVIE THEATER – DTS

4. MONO MOVIE

5. TV SPORTS

6. DISCO

7. ROCK CONCERT

8. CONCERT HALL

If desired, you can adjust the sound output level of each

speaker even if the output level has already been set in

“SPEAKER BALANCE ADJUSTMENT” on pages 23 to 25.

Notes

• The output level of the center speaker cannot be adjusted

when the DISCO, ROCK CONCERT or CONCERT HALL

program is selected, and the input signal is analog, PCM

audio, or encoded with Dolby Digital in 2-channel.

• If the function “CNTR” in the SET MENU mode is set to the

NONE position, the sound output level of the center speaker

cannot be adjusted. This is because, in this mode, the center

speaker sound is automatically output from the left and right

main speakers.

• Once the output level has been adjusted, the level will be the

same for all digital sound field programs.

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost when this unit is set in the standby mode. If, however, the

power plug is disconnected from the AC outlet or the power is cut due to temporary power failure for more than one week, the latest

values for the delay time and the center/rear/subwoofer output levels that were set will automatically return to the preset values. If

so, they can be re-set by simply following the adjustment method on page 39.

Speaker

CENTER

RIGHT REAR

LEFT REAR

SUBWOOFER

Control range (dB)

MIN, –20 to +10

MIN, –20 to 0

Preset value

Control range (ms)

15 to 30

0 to 15

15 to 30

0 to 15

15 to 30

1 to 99

01RX-V595a-e/f4 6/24/99, 11:45 AM40

English

However, at the normal level suitable for listening in your room,

the low-level parts of source sound often cannot be heard well

because they will be lost among noise in your environment.

Dolby Digital technology has also made it possible to reduce an

original sound track’s dynamic range for a home audio format

by “compressing” the sound data.

MAX: In this position, a source encoded with Dolby Digital

is reproduced in the original sound track’s wide

dynamic range to provide you with powerful sounds

just like those in a movie theater.

Selecting this position will be even better if you can

listen to a source at a high output level in a room

specially soundproofed for audio/video enjoyment.

STD (Standard):

In this position, a source encoded with Dolby Digital

is reproduced in the “compressed” dynamic range of

the source that is suitable for low-level listening.

MIN: In this position, the dynamic range is more reduced

than in the STD position.

Selecting this position will be effective when you

must listen to a sound source at a low level.

* In this position, it may happen that sound is output

faintly or not output normally depending on the

source. In that case, select the MAX or STD

position.

DTS LFE (Adjusting the level of the LFE

channel for DTS)

Control range: –10 dB to +10 dB (in 1 dB steps)

Preset value: 0 dB

* This adjustment is effective only when DTS is being decoded

and the signals of the selected source encoded with DTS

contain LFE signals.

This adjusts the output level of the LFE channel. If the LFE

signals are mixed with signals of other channels and they are

output from the same speakers, the ratio of the LFE signal level

to the level of the other signals can be adjusted.

(See page 8 for details about the LFE channel.)

ADJUSTMENTS IN THE “SET MENU” MODE

The following ten types of functions will maximize the performance of your system and expand your enjoyment for audio listening

and video watching.

1. CNTR (CENTER SPEAKER)

2. REAR (REAR SPEAKERS)

3. MAIN (MAIN SPEAKERS)

4. BASS (LFE/BASS OUT)

5. M.LVL (MAIN LEVEL)

6. D.D.LFE

(DOLBY DIGITAL LFE LEVEL)

For details on “CNTR”, “REAR”, “MAIN”, “BASS” and “M.LVL”,

see page 21. (Once you have selected the appropriate

settings, you do not have to change any settings unless an

alteration is made in your speaker system.)

D.D.LFE (Adjusting the level of the LFE

channel for Dolby Digital)

Control range: –20 dB to 0 dB (in 1 dB steps)

Preset value: 0 dB

* This adjustment is effective only when Dolby Digital is being

decoded and the signals of the selected source encoded with

Dolby Digital contain LFE signals.

This adjusts the output level of the LFE channel. If the LFE

signals are mixed with signals of other channels and they are

output from the same speakers, the ratio of the LFE signal level

to the level of the other signals can be adjusted.

(See page 8 for details about the LFE channel.)

D.RNG (Adjusting the dynamic range)

Choices: MAX/STD/MIN

Preset position: MAX

* This adjustment is effective only when Dolby Digital is being

decoded.

“Dynamic range” is the difference between the maximum level

and the minimum level of sounds.

Sounds on a movie originally designed for movie theaters

feature a very wide dynamic range.

Dolby Digital technology can modify the original sound track

into a home audio format with this wide dynamic range un-

changed.

Powerful sounds of extremely wide dynamic range are not

always suitable for home use. Depending upon the condition of

your listening environment, it may not be possible to increase

the sound output to a level as high as that in a movie theater.

7. D.RNG (DYNAMIC RANGE)

8. DTS LFE (DTS LFE LEVEL)

9. C.DELAY (CENTER DELAY)

10. GUARD (MEMORY GUARD)

11. INPUT (INPUT MODE)

01RX-V595a-e/f5 6/24/99, 11:45 AM41

C.DELAY [Adjusting the delay of

center sounds (dialog, etc.)]

Control range: 0 ms to 5 ms (in 1 ms steps)

Preset value: 0 ms

* This adjustment is effective only when Dolby Digital or DTS is

being decoded and the signals of the selected source

encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS contain center-channel

signals.

This adjusts the delay between the main sound (on the main

channels) and dialog, etc. (on the center channel).

The larger the value, the later the dialog, etc. is generated.

This is for making sounds from the left main, center and right

main speakers reach your listening position at the same time.

This is achieved by delaying the sound from the center speaker

if the distance from the center speaker to your listening position

is shorter than the distance from the left or right main speaker

to your listening position.

GUARD (Memory guard)

Choices: ON/OFF

Preset position: OFF

If you wish to prevent accidental alterations to SET MENU and

other adjustments on this unit, select ON. The following

functions on this unit can be locked by this operation:

• Other functions in the SET MENU mode

• Functions in the TIME/LEVEL mode

• Functions when using TEST

INPUT

(Selecting the mode of the TV/DBS input)

Choices: AUTO/LAST

Preset position: AUTO

You can designate the input mode that is automatically selected

when the power of this unit is switched on for only the sources

connected to the TV/DBS input terminals of this unit.

AUTO: In this position, the AUTO input mode is always

selected when the power for this unit is switched on.

LAST: In this position, the input mode you selected last time

is memorized and will not be changed when the

power is switched on again.

* See page 28 for details on switching the input mode.

Adjustment method

Adjustments should be made while watching the information on

this unit’s display.

When adjusting with the remote control, set the SELECTOR

DIAL to the AMP/TUN or DSP position on the remote control.

Press SET MENU once or more so that the function which you

want to change appears on the display.

Front panel Remote control

* After pressing SET MENU once on the remote control, you

can also select the title by pressing

. (Pressing goes back

one selection.)

Press + or – to select any desired position or to edit parameters

of the chosen function.

Front panel Remote control

Repeat these steps to change or adjust the settings of any

other function.

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from

being lost when this unit is set in the standby mode. If,

however, the power plug is disconnected from the AC outlet or

the power is cut due to temporary power failure for more than

one week, the settings of the SET MENU mode will automati-

cally return to the factory settings. If so, they can be re-set by

simply following the procedure above.

01RX-V595a-e/f5 6/24/99, 11:45 AM42

English

You can use the remote control to control not only this unit but also other components connected to it. The remote control is factory

set to control this unit and most YAMAHA audio components.

To control other brands of components, you must preset the remote control with the manufacturers’ codes listed from

page 105.

2 Press the desired operation button.

Note: Press the button with the remote control aimed at

the front panel.

REMOTE CONTROL

Basic operation

1 Select the position for the component that you want to

control by turning the SELECTOR DIAL.

Note: Turn the SELECTOR DIAL until it stops with a click.

Components which can be controlled

There are nine positions that you can select to control connected components with this remote control. When turning the

SELECTOR DIAL, the position changes as follows:

SELECTOR

DIAL

Notes

1. The shaded positions in the diagram above indicate that you can preset the code for the manufacturer of your component.

Note that you can preset only one code for one position. (See “SETUP CODES” on page 49 for details).

2. DVD/LD and DVD MENU positions:

• Be sure that the SELECTOR DIAL is set to the DVD/LD position before presetting the code for a DVD or an LD player. The

code that you preset to the DVD/LD position is also simultaneously preset to the DVD MENU position. You cannot preset the

code for a DVD player when the SELECTOR DIAL is set to the DVD MENU position.

• DVD MENU operations cannot be performed for some DVD players.

3. When using a second (and third) VCR (See “To use a second (and third) VCR” on page 49 for details.):

• If you are not using a CBL/DBS (cable TV or DBS tuner), the second (or third) VCR can be preset by using the CBL/DBS

position.

• If you are not using a DVD player, the second (or third) VCR can be preset by using the DVD MENU position. Note that in

this case you must preset the code for an LD player to the DVD/LD position even if an LD player is not being used.

4. The button functions on the remote control differ depending on the position selected by the SELECTOR DIAL. Refer to the

following pages for details.

DVD/LD & DVD MENU:

An LD player can be controlled by using the DVD/LD position.

A DVD player can be controlled by using the DVD/LD and

DVD MENU positions. The code for a YAMAHA DVD player is

preset. If the remote control will not operate your YAMAHA

DVD player, you need to preset code number “4490.”

AMP/TUN:

You can perform the basic

operations of this unit with the

SELECTOR DIAL set to this

position.

TAPE/MD:

The code for a YAMAHA tape deck is preset.

(Be sure to preset the proper code when operating a YAMAHA

MD recorder.)

CD:

The code for a YAMAHA CD player is preset.

DSP:

This unit can be controlled and DSP programs can be selected

directly.

VCR:

A VCR can be controlled.

CBL/DBS:

A cable television or

DBS tuner can be

controlled.

TV:

A television can be

controlled.

Indicator

The indicator will flash when the button is

pressed.

The position name is displayed

in this window.

01RX-V595a-e/f6 6/24/99, 11:45 AM43

■ AMP/TUN Note: TV POWER and TV VOLUME function if you have preset the code for your TV.

1 POWER

This button turns the unit on.

2 INPUT

Press one of these buttons to select the required input source.

3 EXT. DEC.

Press this button when using an external decoder.

4 A/B/C/D/E

Press this button to select a group of preset stations.

5 DSP

Press this button. While the indicator is lit up for about three

seconds, select a DSP program by using the number buttons (1

to 8). No DSP program can be selected after the indicator goes

off.

6 PRESET (+/–)

Press these buttons to select the preset station number.

7 VOLUME ( )

Press these buttons to adjust the volume level.

8 MUTE

Press this button to mute the sound. To cancel mute, press this

button once more, or press the operation buttons of this unit.

9 SLEEP

Press this button to set the SLEEP timer.

0 (LEFT), (RIGHT)

These buttons are used to adjust the settings of the SET MENU

mode and the TIME/LEVEL mode.

q TIME/LEVEL

Press this button to set the unit in the TIME/LEVEL mode and to

select the item.

w STANDBY

Press this button to set this unit in the standby mode.

e TEST

Press this button to output a test tone for adjusting the output

level of the speakers.

r EFCT (EFFECT) ON/OFF

Press this button to turn on or off the DSP program which

includes the Dolby Pro Logic decoder, the Dolby Digital

decoder and the DTS decoder.

t (NEXT), (BACK)

These buttons are used to advance or go back one selection in

the SET MENU mode and TIME/LEVEL mode.

y SET MENU

Press this button to set the unit in the SET MENU mode and to

select functions.

2 DSP program

Press one of these buttons to select the required DSP program

(1 to 8). When you select the input source, set the SELECTOR

DIAL to the AMP/TUN position.

Note: The function of all buttons other than DSP program is

the same as that with the AMP/TUN position.

■ DSP

Indicator:

Flashes in red

when the button

is pressed.

Indicator window:

Displays the names of

components which

can be controlled.

SELECTOR DIAL:

Selects the

position for the

component to be

controlled.

The lightly marked buttons do not function.

TV VOLUME

TV POWER

01RX-V595a-e/f6 6/24/99, 11:45 AM44

English

The lightly marked buttons do not function. See “AMP/TUN” on page 44 for those buttons which are not described here.

Please refer to the owner’s manual for details of each component.

■CD

■TAPE/MD

Note: TV POWER, TV VOLUME and TV INPUT function if you have preset the code

for your TV.

1 POWER

This button turns the unit on under factory settings. If another code for your CD player

whose remote control has a power button is preset, the button will turn on the CD

player.

2 DISC SKIP (+/–) (for a CD player with a CD changer)

Press these buttons to skip to the next or previous CD.

3 , (SKIP)

Press

to skip to the beginning of the next track. Press to skip to the beginning

of the previous track.

4 (PLAY)

Press this button to play a CD.

5 (SEARCH)

This button initiates a backward search on the track that is playing to find the point

from which you want to listen.

6 (PAUSE)

Press this button to give a pause in operation. This button functions as PAUSE/

STOP* for operating YAMAHA CD players under factory settings.

7 (STOP)

Press this button to stop operation. This button functions as PAUSE/STOP* for

operating YAMAHA CD players under factory settings.

8 (SEARCH)

This button initiates a fast-forward search on the track that is playing to find the point

from which you want to listen.



Notes: •

TV POWER and TV VOLUME function if you have preset the code for your TV.

• Be sure to preset the proper code for your MD recorder.

TAPE

1 POWER

This button turns the unit on under factory settings. If another

code for your tape deck whose remote control has a power

button is preset, the button will turn on the tape deck.

2 (REC/PAUSE)

Press this button to give a pause in recording on the

tape deck.

3 DIR A

Press this button to select the playing direction of deck A.

4 (PLAY)

Press this button to play a tape.

5 (REWIND)

Press this button to rewind a tape.

7 DECK A/B

Press this button to select deck A or B on the double

cassette tape deck.

9 DIR B

Press this button to select the playing direction of deck B.

0 (STOP)

Press this button to stop the operation of a tape.

q (FAST FORWARD)

Press this button to fast forward a tape.

1 POWER

This button turns the unit on if

you have preset the code for

the YAMAHA MD recorder. If

another code for your MD

recorder whose remote control

has a power button is preset,

the button will turn on the MD

recorder.

2 (REC/PAUSE)

3 (SKIP)

4 (PLAY)

5 (SEARCH)

6 DISP (DISPLAY)

8 (PAUSE)

9 (SKIP)

0 (STOP)

q (SEARCH)

TV VOLUME

POWER

TV VOLUME

POWER

TV INPUT

DISPLAY

* PAUSE/STOP function ... Press the button once to give a pause in operation and once more to stop operation.

01RX-V595a-e/f6 6/24/99, 11:46 AM45

■DVD MENU

The lightly marked buttons do not function. See “AMP/TUN” on page 44 for those buttons which are not described here.

Please refer to the owner’s manual for details of each component.

DISC SKIP

SKIP/SEARCH

PLAY

SUBTITLE (DVD)/SEARCH (LD)

SUBTITLE ON/OFF (DVD)

DISPLAY

PAUSE

STOP

ANGLE (DVD)/SEARCH (LD)

AUDIO (DVD)

Numeric buttons

+10

DISC SKIP

MENU LEFT

MENU SELECT

SET UP

TITLE

CLEAR

TITLE/INDEX

MENU UP

MENU RIGHT

MENU DOWN

RETURN

Note: TV POWER, TV VOLUME and TV INPUT

function if you have preset the code for your TV.

■DVD/LD

Note: TV POWER, TV VOLUME and TV INPUT

function if you have preset the code for your TV.

TV POWER

TV VOLUME

TV INPUT

TV POWER

TV VOLUME

TV INPUT

POWER

(DVD) This button turns the unit on under factory

settings. If another code for your DVD player

whose remote control has a power button is

preset, the button will turn on the DVD player.

(LD) This button turns the unit on if you have

preset the code for the YAMAHA LD player. If

another code for your LD player whose remote

control has a power button is preset, the button

will turn on the LD player.

POWER

This button turns the unit on under factory

settings. If another code for your DVD player

whose remote control has a power button is

preset, the button will turn on the DVD player.

01RX-V595a-e/f6 6/24/99, 11:46 AM46

English

■CBL/DBS

Note: TV POWER, TV VOLUME and TV

INPUT function if you have preset

the code for your TV.

■VCR

Note: TV POWER, TV VOLUME and TV INPUT function if you

have preset the code for your TV.

POWER

DISPLAY

CHANNEL

CHANNEL ENTER

VCR REC

Press this button twice

to start recording.

CHANNEL UP DOWN

PLAY

REWIND

PAUSE

STOP

FAST FORWARD

POWER

DISPLAY

CHANNEL

CHANNEL ENTER

MENU LEFT

CHANNEL UP DOWN

MENU SELECT

MENU UP

MENU RIGHT

MENU DOWN

+100

RECALL

■TV

Note: You can only control your VCR if you have preset the

code for it.

DISPLAY

CHANNEL

CHANNEL ENTER

TV MUTE

CHANNEL UP DOWN

TV SLEEP

TV POWER

TV INPUT

TV EFFECT ON/OFF

TV VOLUME

The lightly marked buttons do not function. See “AMP/TUN” on page 44 for those buttons which are not described here.

Please refer to the owner’s manual for details of each component.

TV VOLUME

TV INPUT

TV POWER

TV VOLUME

TV INPUT

VCR REC

Press this button twice.

VCR REWIND

VCR PLAY

VCR PAUSE

VCR STOP

VCR FAST

FORWARD

TV POWER

POWER

01RX-V595a-e/f6 6/24/99, 11:46 AM47

Remote control operation range

Notes

• There should be no large obstacles between the remote

control and the unit.

• If the remote control sensor is directly illuminated by strong

lighting (especially from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp),

it might cause the remote control not to work correctly. In this

case, reposition the unit to avoid direct lighting.

NOTES ABOUT THE REMOTE CONTROL

Battery installation

1. Turn the remote control over and slide the battery compart-

ment cover in the direction of the arrow.

2. Insert the batteries (AA, R6 or UM-3 type) according the

polarity markings on the inside of the battery compartment.

3. Close the battery compartment cover.

Battery replacement

If the remote control operates only when it is close to the unit,

the batteries are weak. Replace all the batteries with new

ones.

Be sure to replace the batteries within about two minutes. If

it takes longer than two minutes, the codes preset for the

remote control will return to the factory settings.

Notes

• Use only AA, R6 or UM-3 batteries for replacement.

• Be sure the battery polarity is correct. (See the illustration

inside the battery compartment.)

• Remove the batteries if the remote control will not be used for

an extended period of time.

• If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately.

Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into

contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment

thoroughly before installing new batteries.

Remote control

sensor

Within approximately

6 m (20 feet)

01RX-V595a-e/f6 6/24/99, 11:46 AM48

English

SETUP CODES

If you are using the DVD MENU position

for a second (or third) VCR, you must

preset the code for an LD player to the

DVD/LD position.

1. Turn on the VCR to be used.

2. Set the SELECTOR DIAL to the

CBL/DBS or DVD MENU position.

3. Press both VOLUME buttons (

) for about four seconds at the

same time so that the indicator

flashes twice.

4. Press MUTE.

5. Use the numeric buttons to enter the

four-digit code for the second (or

third) VCR. Make sure that the

indicator flashes twice. If the

indicator does not flash, repeat

steps 3 and 4, and re-enter the

code.

6. Press POWER (or any other button)

on the remote control to check if you

have preset the code correctly. If

the VCR cannot be controlled with

the remote control, try entering

another code for the same manufac-

turer.

To control your components

(MD recorder, DVD player,

TV, etc.)

1. Turn on the component to be used.

2. Set the SELECTOR DIAL to the

desired position for the component

(TAPE/MD, DVD/LD, TV, etc.).

3. Press both VOLUME buttons (

) for about four seconds at the

same time so that the indicator

flashes twice.

4. Use the numeric buttons to enter the

four-digit manufacturer’s code for

the component to be used. Make

sure that the indicator flashes twice.

If the indicator does not flash, repeat

step 3 and re-enter the code.

5. Press POWER (or any other button)

on the remote control to check if you

have preset the code correctly. If

the component cannot be controlled

with the remote control, try entering

another code for the same manufac-

turer.

To use a second (and third) VCR

You can use the CBL/DBS and/or DVD

MENU positions to control a second

(and/or third) VCR if a CBL (or DBS) or

DVD player is not being used.

Returning to the factory-set

codes

To return all components to the factory-

set codes, follow these steps.

1. Set the SELECTOR DIAL to a

position other than the AMP/TUN or

DSP position.

2. Press both VOLUME buttons (

) for about four seconds at the

same time so that the indicator

flashes twice.

3. Enter code number “9987”.

4. Make sure that the indicator flashes

twice.

To return each component to the factory-

set code, follow these steps.

1. Set the SELECTOR DIAL to the

position for the component to be

returned to the factory-set code.

2. Press both VOLUME buttons (

) for about four seconds at the

same time so that the indicator

flashes twice.

3. Enter code number “9999”.

4. Make sure that the indicator flashes

twice.

The following codes are preset as the

factory settings.

Factory-set codes

POSITION Component Code

Code

TV TV 0037 0047

CBL/DBS DBS tuner 2455 2566

VCR VCR 3072 3060

DVD/LD DVD player

4545 YAMAHA

CD CD player

6187 YAMAHA

TAPE/MD Tape deck

8524 YAMAHA

*1: Australia model

*2: U.S.A., Canada and China models

We recommend that you write all the

code numbers you have preset on the

“Quick Reference Card.”

Presetting the remote control

Perform the presetting procedure for each component you want to control with the remote control.

Note: If your component does not respond to any of the codes listed for the manufacturer, use the original remote control that was

supplied with the component.

01RX-V595a-e/f6 6/24/99, 11:46 AM49

SYMPTOM

The unit fails to turn on when

STANDBY/ON is pressed, or set in

the standby mode suddenly soon

after the power has been turned on.

The unit does not work normally.

No sound or no picture.

No picture.

The sound suddenly goes off.

Only the speakers on one side can

be heard.

A “humming” sound can be heard.

The volume level is low while playing

a record.

The volume level cannot be

increased, or the sound is distorted.

CAUSE

The power cord is not plugged in or the

plug is not completely inserted.

The IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch

on the rear panel is not fully set to the

upper or lower end.

The internal microcomputer has been

frozen by an external electric shock

(lightning, excessive static electricity,

etc.) or by a power supply with low

voltage.

Incorrect output cord connections.

An appropriate input source has not

been selected.

SPEAKERS have not been set

properly.

The speaker connections are not

secure.

Digital signals other than PCM audio

and Dolby Digital or DTS encoded

signals which this unit cannot

reproduce are input to this unit by

playing a CD-ROM etc.

There is no S video terminal connection

between this unit and the TV, although

S video signals are input to this unit.

The protection circuit has been

activated because of a short circuit, etc.

The SLEEP timer has functioned.

Incorrect setting of BALANCE.

Incorrect cord connections.

No connection from the turntable to the

GND terminal.

The record is being played on a

turntable with an MC cartridge.

The component connected to the REC

OUT terminals of this unit is in the

standby mode.

REMEDY

Firmly plug in the power cord.

Set the switch fully to the upper or

lower end when the unit is in the

standby mode.

Set the unit in the standby mode and

disconnect the AC power cord from the

AC outlet. After about 30 seconds have

passed, connect the power and operate

the unit again.

Connect the cords properly. If the

problem persists, the cords may be

defective.

Select an appropriate input source with

INPUT or TAPE/MD MON / EXT.

DECODER.

Set SPEAKERS corresponding to the

speakers in use to the ON position.

Secure the connections.

Play a source whose signals this unit

can reproduce.

Connect this unit’s S VIDEO MONITOR

OUT terminal to the TV’s S video input

terminal.

Set the unit in the standby mode and

then switch on again to reset the

protection circuit.

Turn on the power, and play the source

again.

Adjust it to the appropriate position.

Connect the cords properly. If the

problem persists, the cords may be

defective.

Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the

problem persists, the cords may be

defective.

Make the GND connection between the

turntable and this unit.

The turntable should be connected to

the unit through the MC head amplifier.

Turn on the power to the component.

Amplifier

TROUBLESHOOTING

If the unit fails to operate normally, check the following points to determine whether the fault can be corrected by the simple

measures suggested. If it cannot be corrected, or if the fault is not listed in the SYMPTOM column, disconnect the power cord and

contact your authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center for help.

01RX-V595a-e/f7 6/24/99, 11:47 AM50

English

SYMPTOM

No sound from the effect speakers.

No sound from the rear speakers.

No sound from the center speaker.

The sound field cannot be recorded.

The DVD/LD, TV or DBS source

cannot be recorded on a tape deck,

MD recorder or VCR connected to

this unit.

FM stereo reception is noisy.

There is distortion and clear

reception cannot be obtained even

with a good FM antenna.

The desired station cannot be tuned

in with the automatic tuning method.

Previously preset stations can no

longer be tuned in.

The desired station cannot be tuned

in with the automatic tuning method.

There are continuous crackling and

hissing noises.

There are buzzing and whining

noises (especially in the evening).

CAUSE

The sound effect setting is off.

A Dolby Surround or DTS decoding

program is being used with material not

encoded with Dolby Surround or DTS.

The sound output level of the rear

speakers is set to minimum.

A monaural sound source is being

played in the DOLBY PRO LOGIC or

DOLBY PRO LOGIC ENHANCED

program.

The sound output level of the center

speaker is set to minimum.

The function “CNTR” in the SET MENU

is set to the NONE position.

Incorrect sound field program selection.

The input signals of the source encoded

with Dolby Digital or DTS do not have

center channel signals.

It is not possible to record the sound

field on a tape deck or MD recorder

connected to the unit’s REC OUT

terminals.

The DVD/LD player, TV or DBS tuner is

connected to the unit by only the digital

terminals.

The characteristics of FM stereo

broadcasts may cause this problem

when the transmitter is too far away or

the antenna input is poor.

There is multipath interference.

The station is too weak.

The unit has been unplugged for a long

period.

The signal is weak or the antenna

connections are loose.

Noise will result from lightning,

fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats

and other electrical equipment.

A television set is being used nearby.

REMEDY

Press EFFECT on the front panel or

EFCT ON/OFF on the remote control to

turn it on.

Use a different sound field program.

Raise the sound output level of the rear

speakers.

Select another sound field program

suitable for the monaural sound source.

Raise the sound output level of the

center speaker.

Select the LARGE or SMALL position.

Select the appropriate program.

Refer to the instructions for the source

being currently played.

Make additional connections between

the analog terminals.

Check the antenna connections.

Try using a high-quality directional FM

antenna.

Set TUNING MODE to the manual

tuning mode.

Adjust the antenna position to eliminate

multipath interference.

Use the manual tuning method.

Use a high-quality directional FM

antenna.

Repeat the presetting procedure.

Tighten the AM loop antenna

connections and rotate it for best

reception.

Use the manual tuning method.

Use an outdoor antenna and a ground

wire. This will help somewhat, but it is

difficult to eliminate all noise.

Relocate this unit away from the TV.

Amplifier

01RX-V595a-e/f7 6/24/99, 11:47 AM51

Remote control

Others

SYMPTOM

The remote control does not work.

The sound is degraded when

listening with the headphones to a

CD player or tape deck that is

connected to this unit.

There is noise interference from

digital or high-frequency equipment

or the unit.

CAUSE

Direct sunlight or lighting (from an

inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is

striking the remote control sensor of this

unit.

The manufacturer’s code has not been

set properly.

The proper manufacturer’s code for the

component to be controlled has not

been set.

The component to be controlled has not

been selected.

This unit is in the standby mode.

The unit is too close to the digital or

high-frequency equipment.

REMEDY

Change the position of this unit.

Set the code again.

Try entering another code for the same

manufacturer.

Set the SELECTOR DIAL to the proper

position.

Turn on the power of the unit.

Move the unit further away from such

equipment.

SYMPTOM

A loud hissing noise is heard when you

play back a source encoded with DTS.

A percussive noise is heard when you

begin playing back a source encoded

with DTS.

No sound is heard when you play back a

source encoded with DTS, even though

the AUTO input mode is selected on this

unit.

No sound is heard when you play back

an MD or DAT on to which you have

recorded a source encoded with DTS.

No sound is heard when you play back a

source (CD, etc.) even though the

currently selected input mode is AUTO.

CAUSE

The player which plays back the source

is not connected to a digital audio signal

input terminal of this unit.

The ANALOG input mode is selected on

this unit.

If the AUTO input mode is selected,

depending on some sources, there may

be a case that a noise is heard while

this unit is identifying the format of the

input signal.

The DTS decoder built into this unit

does not function because the player

has a digital volume control and it is set

at a position other than “maximum,”

“neutral” or “ineffective.”

A source encoded with DTS cannot be

recorded on to an MD or DAT.

In the AUTO mode, the DTS-decoding

mode cannot be automatically changed

to the normal (PCM) digital signal input

mode.

REMEDY

The player must be connected to a

digital audio signal input terminal of this

unit besides the analog audio signal

terminal connections.

Select a proper input mode on this unit

to turn on the DTS decoder built into

the unit.

Set the input mode of the currently

selected input source to DTS.

Set the player’s digital volume control

at the maximum, neutral or ineffective

position.

Press INPUT MODE on the front panel

or INPUT (for the currently selected

source) on the remote control so that

AUTO appears on the display.

When playing back a source encoded with DTS

Notes

• It is necessary to use a DTS decoder to play back a source encoded with DTS, so the player which plays back the source must

be connected to a digital audio input terminal of this unit in the way described in this manual. If this connection is not made or

only a D-to-A converter is being used without using a DTS decoder, when you play back the source, only a loud hissing noise will

be heard.

• If you make a search (or skip, etc.) operation while playing back a source encoded with DTS, the “dts” indicator goes out from the

display. This is because this unit automatically changes the DTS-decoding mode to the standard (PCM) digital signal input mode

to prevent a noise from being output.

01RX-V595a-e/f7 6/24/99, 11:47 AM52

English

AUDIO SECTION

Minimum RMS Output Power

8 ohms, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD

[U.S.A. and Canada models]

MAIN L/R ........................... 70 W + 70 W

CENTER......................................... 70 W

REAR L/R.......................... 70 W + 70 W

[Australia, Singapore, China and General

models]

MAIN L/R ........................... 65 W + 65 W

CENTER......................................... 65 W

REAR L/R.......................... 65 W + 65 W

8 ohms, 1 kHz, 0.07% THD

[U.S.A. and Canada models]

MAIN L/R ........................... 85 W + 85 W

CENTER......................................... 85 W

REAR L/R.......................... 85 W + 85 W

[Australia, Singapore, China and General

models]

MAIN L/R ........................... 80 W + 80 W

CENTER......................................... 80 W

REAR L/R.......................... 80 W + 80 W

Maximum Power

[China and General models only]

8 ohms, 1 kHz, 10% THD

MAIN L/R ......................... 105 W + 105 W

CENTER ......................................... 105 W

REAR L/R ........................ 105 W + 105 W

Dynamic Power per Channel

(by IHF Dynamic Headroom measuring method)

MAIN L/R

8/6/4/2 ohms

[U.S.A. and Canada models]

................................... 100/120/145/170 W

[Australia, Singapore, China and General

models] ........................ 90/110/135/160 W

Dynamic Headroom (8 ohms)

[U.S.A. and Canada models only] ... 1.55 dB

Power Band Width

MAIN L/R

8 ohms, 35 W, 0.1% THD

.........................................10 Hz to 50 kHz

Damping Factor (SPEAKER A)

8 ohms, 20 Hz to 20 kHz ............ 60 or more

Input Sensitivity/Impedance

PHONO MM ................... 2.5 mV/47 k-ohms

CD/TAPE·MD/DVD·LD/TV·DBS/VCR/

VIDEO AUX ................... 150 mV/47 k-ohms

EXT. DECODER

MAIN L/R .................... 150 mV/47 k-ohms

CENTER/SURROUND L/R/SUBWOOFER

.................................... 150 mV/40 k-ohms

Maximum Input Signal

PHONO MM

1 kHz, 0.1% THD .............100 mV or more

CD/TAPE·MD/DVD·LD/TV·DBS/VCR/

VIDEO AUX (EFFECT ON)

1 kHz, 0.5% THD ..................2.2V or more

Output Level/Impedance

REC OUT ..................... 150 mV/1.2 k-ohms

SUBWOOFER

(MAIN SP: SMALL) ........ 4.0 V/1.2 k-ohms

Headphones Jack Rated Output/Impedance

CD/TAPE·MD/DVD·LD/TV·DBS/VCR/

VIDEO AUX input,

1 kHz, 150 mV, 8 ohms ...... 0.5 V/390 ohms

Frequency Response (20 Hz to 20 kHz)

CD/TAPE·MD/DVD·LD/TV·DBS/VCR/

VIDEO AUX to MAIN L/R SP OUT

.................................................... 0±0.5 dB

RIAA Equalization Deviation

PHONO MM .................................. 0±0.5 dB

Total Harmonic Distortion (20 Hz to 20 kHz)

PHONO MM to REC OUT

1 V........................................0.02% or less

CD/TAPE·MD/DVD·LD/TV·DBS/VCR/

VIDEO AUX (EFFECT OFF) to MAIN SP OUT

35 W/8

ohms ......................0.025% or less

Signal-to-Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)

PHONO MM to REC OUT

(5 mV, Input Shorted)

[U.S.A., Canada, China and General

models] ...............................86 dB or more

[Australia and Singapore models]

............................................81 dB or more

CD/TAPE·MD/DVD·LD/TV·DBS/VCR/

VIDEO AUX (EFFECT OFF) to MAIN SP OUT

(150 mV, Input Shorted) ......96 dB or more

Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)

MAIN L/R SP OUT................ 150 µV or less

Channel Separation

(Vol. –30 dB, EFFECT OFF)

PHONO MM

(Input Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz)

....................60 dB or more/55 dB or more

CD/TAPE·MD/DVD·LD/TV·DBS/VCR/

VIDEO AUX

(Input 5.1 k-ohms Terminated, 1 kHz/10 kHz)

....................60 dB or more/45 dB or more

Tone Control Characteristics

BASS: Boost/cut ............. ±10 dB (50 Hz)

Turnover Frequency......... 350 Hz

TREBLE: Boost/cut ........... ±10 dB (20 kHz)

Turnover Frequency........ 3.5 kHz

Filter Characteristics

MAIN L/R, REAR L/R (SPEAKER: SMALL)

(H.P.F.) .................... fc = 90 Hz, 12 dB/oct.

SUBWOOFER

(L.P.F.) ..................... fc = 90 Hz, 18 dB/oct.

VIDEO SECTION

Video Signal Type

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ..............NTSC

[Australia and Singapore models] ......... PAL

[China and General models]....... NTSC/PAL

Video Signal Level ................ 1 Vp-p/75 ohms

S-Video Signal Level

Y ......................................... 1 Vp-p/75 ohms

C .................................. 0.286 Vp-p/75 ohms

Maximum Input Level .......... 1.5 Vp-p or more

Signal-to-Noise Ratio ...............50 dB or more

Monitor Out Frequency Response

.............................. 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB

SPECIFICATIONS

01RX-V595a-e/f7 6/24/99, 11:47 AM53

FM SECTION

Tuning Range

[U.S.A. and Canada models]

..................................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz

[Australia and Singapore models]

................................. 87.50 to 108.00 MHz

[China and General models]

100 kHz step ................ 87.5 to 108.0 MHz

50 kHz step .............. 87.50 to 108.00 MHz

50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF)

(100% mod., 1 kHz)

[U.S.A., Canada, China and General models

only]

Mono .............................. 1.6 µV (15.3 dBf)

Stereo ............................. 23 µV (38.5 dBf)

Usable Sensitivity (DIN)

[Australia and Singapore models only]

Mono (S/N 26 dB) ........................... 0.9 µV

Stereo (S/N 46 dB)........................... 28 µV

Alternate Channel Selectivity (±400 kHz )

[U.S.A., Canada, China and General models

only] .................................................... 75 dB

Selectivity (two signals, 40 kHz Dev. ±300 kHz)

[Australia and Singapore models only]

......................................................... 55 dB

Signal-to-Noise Ratio

[U.S.A., Canada, China and General

models]

(IHF) Mono/Stereo .................81 dB/75 dB

[Australia and Singapore models]

(DIN-Weighted, 40 kHz Dev.) Mono/Stereo

...............................................75 dB/69 dB

Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)

Mono/Stereo .................................. 0.1/0.2%

Stereo Separation (1 kHz) .................... 48 dB

Frequency Response

20 Hz to 15 kHz ................................ 0±1 dB

Antenna Input.............. 75 ohms, Unbalanced

Output Level

[U.S.A., Canada, China and General

models]

(100% mod., 1 kHz) ...................... 550 mV

[Australia and Singapore models]

(40 kHz Dev., 1 kHz) ..................... 550 mV

AM SECTION

Tuning Range

[U.S.A. and Canada models]

....................................... 530 to 1,710 kHz

[Australia and Singapore models]

....................................... 531 to 1,611 kHz

[China and General models]

10 kHz step .................... 530 to 1,710 kHz

9 kHz step ...................... 531 to 1,611 kHz

Usable Sensitivity............................ 300 µV/m

Signal-to-Noise Ratio ............................ 52 dB

Antenna.................................... Loop antenna

Output Level

(30% mod., 1 kHz)........................... 150 mV

GENERAL

Power Supply

[U.S.A. and Canada models]

........................................ AC 120 V, 60 Hz

[Australia model]................ AC 240 V, 50 Hz

[General model]

.............. AC 110/120/220/240 V, 50/60 Hz

[China model] .................... AC 220 V, 50 Hz

[Singapore model] .............AC 230 V, 50 Hz

Power Consumption

[U.S.A. model] ................................... 280 W

[Canada model] .................... 310 W/410 VA

[Australia and Singapore models] ..... 300 W

[China and General models].............. 310 W

Maximum Power Consumption

[General model only]

5 ch, 10% THD .................................. 650 W

AC Outlets

2 SWITCHED OUTLETS

[U.S.A., Canada, Singapore, China and

General models]............. 100 W max. total

1 SWITCHED OUTLET

[Australia model] .................... 100 W max.

Dimensions (W x H x D)

..................................435 x 151 x 391 mm

(17-1/8” x 5-15/16” x 15-3/8”)

Weight ..........................12.5 kg (27 lbs. 8 oz.)

Accessories......................... AM loop antenna

Indoor FM antenna

Remote control

Batteries

Antenna adapter

(U.S.A. and Canada models only)

Specifications are subject to change without

notice.

01RX-V595a-e/f7 6/24/99, 11:47 AM54

105

Quasar 0250

Quelle 0037, 0010, 0554,

0011, 0070, 0074,

0084, 0200, 0213,

0306, 0327,

0328, 0361

Questa 0036

R-Line 0037

RBM 0070

RCA 0090, 0093

Radio Shack 0032

Radiola 0037, 0012, 0323

Rank Arena 0036

Realistic 0032

Rediffusion 0361

Revox 0037

Rex 0206, 0264, 0163, 0259

Rhapsody 0216

Roadstar 0218, 0418,

0009, 0264

SBR 0037, 0012, 0043

SEG 0217, 0264, 0036, 0076

SEI 0294, 0102, 0213

Saba 0109, 0075, 0163,

0196, 0198, 0205,

0213, 0287,

0335, 0343

Saccs 0238

Saisho 0009, 0264, 0431,

0011, 0235

Salora 0163, 0349, 0359, 0361

Sambers 0102, 0076, 0213

Sampo 0032

Samsung 0037, 0370, 0217,

0009, 0264, 0032,

0090, 0290

Sandra 0216

Sanyo 0072, 0036, 0011,

0146, 0157, 0208,

0213, 0339

Schaub Lorenz 0361

Schneider 0037, 0218, 0371,

0247, 0303, 0323,

0336, 0352

Sears 0146

Sei-Sinudyne 0010

Seleco 0206, 0163, 0259, 0362

Sentra 0035

Sharp 0036, 0093, 0157

Shorai 0294

Siarem 0102, 0213

Siemens 0037, 0554, 0157,

0191, 0195, 0200,

0213, 0327, 0328

Silver 0036

Sinudyne 0294, 0102,

0213, 0235

Solavox 0032, 0163

Sonitron 0208

Sonoko 0037, 0009

Sonolor 0163, 0208, 0215

Sontec 0037

Sony 0036, 0010, 0011

Soundwave 0037, 0418

Standard 0217, 0218, 0009

Stern 0206, 0163, 0259

Sunkai 0294, 0321

Susumu 0218

Sysline 0037

Tandy 0217, 0218, 0072,

0093, 0163

Tashiko 0217, 0036, 0043, 0359

Tatung 0037, 0217, 0072

Tec 0217, 0247

Technema 0320

Technics 0250

Teknika 0150

Teleavia 0205, 0333, 0343

Telefunken 0109, 0005, 0074,

0084, 0101, 0213,

0262, 0306,

0335, 0343

Telemeister 0320

Teletech 0009

Teleton 0217, 0206, 0349

Abex 0032

Acura 0009

Admiral 0093, 0163, 0213

Adyson 0217, 0032

Akai 0208, 0361

Akura 0218, 0264, 0369

Alaron 0216

Alba 0037, 0218, 0371,

0009, 0036, 0235

Allorgan 0294

Amplivision 0217

Amstrad 0371, 0009,

0362, 0369

Anam 0009, 0068

Anitech 0009, 0068, 0076

Arcam 0216, 0217

Asberg 0076

Asuka 0218

Atlantic 0206

Audiosonic 0037, 0109

Autovox 0206, 0076, 0336

BPL 0282

BSR 0294

BTC 0218

Baird 0343

Basic Line 0218, 0009

Baur 0037, 0010, 0554,

0349, 0361

Beko 0370

Beon 0037

Binatone 0217

Blaupunkt 0554, 0191, 0195,

0200, 0213,

0327, 0328

Blue Sky 0218

Blue Star 0282

Bondstec 0247

Boots 0217

Brandt 0109, 0196, 0198,

0205, 0333, 0335

Brionvega 0362

Britannia 0216

Bush 0037, 0218, 0374,

0371, 0294, 0009,

0282, 0036, 0349

CCE 0037, 0217

CGE 0074, 0076, 0084,

0247, 0306

CS Electronics 0216

CTC 0247

Carrefour 0036

Cascade 0009

Cathay 0037

Centurion 0037

Century 0213

Cimline 0009

Clarivox 0037

Clatronic 0370, 0076, 0247

Condor 0370, 0320

Contec 0216, 0009, 0036, 0157

Continental Edison 0196, 0198,

0205, 0333

Crosley 0074, 0076, 0084, 0213

Crown 0037, 0370, 0418,

0009, 0076

Crystal 0431

Curtis Mathes 0093

Cybertron 0218

Daewoo 0037, 0374, 0009

Dainichi 0218, 0215

Dansai 0037

Dayton 0009

De Graaf 0208

Decca 0037, 0072

Dixi 0037, 0009

Dual 0336, 0352

Dual Tec 0217

Dumont 0070

Elbe 0259

Elin 0037

Elite 0218, 0320

Elta 0009

Emerson 0282, 0213, 0361

Erres 0037, 0012

Expert 0206

Ferguson 0037, 0109, 0005,

0073, 0190, 0238,

0287, 0335, 0343

Fidelity 0216, 0361

Finlandia 0208, 0346, 0359

Finlux 0037, 0072, 0070,

0105, 0346

Firstline 0216, 0217, 0294,

0009, 0321, 0247

Fisher 0370, 0217, 0208, 0303

Flint 0455

Formenti 0037, 0320, 0213

Frontech 0264, 0431,

0163, 0247

Fujitsu 0072, 0206

Funai 0294, 0264, 0303

GE 0282, 0093

GEC 0037, 0217, 0072,

0043, 0205

GPM 0218

Geloso 0009, 0213

Genexxa 0218, 0163

GoldStar 0037, 0217, 0109,

0032, 0290

Goodmans 0037, 0217, 0374,

0371, 0072, 0036,

0235, 0317, 0343

Gorenje 0370

Gradiente 0053

Graetz 0163, 0361

Granada 0037, 0217, 0072,

0146, 0208,

0339, 0359

Grandin 0282

Grundig 0037, 0554, 0070,

0191, 0195, 0205

HCM 0009, 0282

Hanseatic 0037, 0320, 0361

Harley Davidson 0043

Harvard 0068

Hinari 0037, 0218, 0009, 0036

Hisawa 0282, 0455

Hitachi 0217, 0036, 0109,

0032, 0043, 0044,

0105, 0163, 0196,

0198, 0225,

0306, 0349

Huanyu 0216, 0374

Hypson 0037, 0282, 0264

ICE 0217, 0371, 0264

ICeS 0218

ITS 0371

ITT 0163, 0361

Imperial 0370, 0418, 0074,

0076, 0084, 0247

Indiana 0037

Ingelen 0163

Inno Hit 0072

Interbuy 0068

Interfunk 0037, 0163,

0247, 0361

Intervision 0037, 0217, 0264,

0102, 0068

Isukai 0218

JVC 0371, 0036, 0053,

0190, 0192

KTV 0217

Kaisui 0216, 0217, 0218,

0009, 0282

Kamp 0216

Kapsch 0206, 0163

Kawasho 0216

Kendo 0037, 0235, 0362

Kingsley 0216

Kneissel 0259

Korpel 0037

Koyoda 0009

Leyco 0037, 0294, 0072, 0264

Liesenk & Tter 0037

Lloytron 0032

Loewe 0075

Luma 0206

Luxor 0349, 0361

M Electronic 0037, 0217,

0374, 0009,

0109, 0068,

0105, 0163,

0287, 0346

MGA 0150

MTC 0216, 0349

Magnadyne 0102, 0247

Magnafon 0102, 0076, 0213

Magnavox 0036

Manesth 0217, 0320,

0264, 0235

Marantz 0037

Mark 0037

Matsui 0037, 0217, 0371, 0294,

0009, 0072, 0036, 0035,

0011, 0208, 0235

Matsushita 0250

McMichael 0043

Mediator 0037, 0012

Memorex 0009, 0250, 0150

Memphis 0337

Metz 0213, 0367

Midland 0032

Minerva 0554, 0070

Minoka 0369

Mitsubishi 0036, 0093, 0108, 0150

Mivar 0216, 0290, 0291, 0292

Motion 0076

Motorola 0093

Multitech 0216, 0217, 0009,

0102, 0076

NEC 0455, 0036

NEI 0037, 0431, 0337

Neckermann 0037, 0554, 0191,

0213, 0349

Nikkai 0037, 0216, 0218, 0072,

0264, 0035, 0032, 0337

Nikko 0317

Nobliko 0102, 0076

Nokia 0361

Nordmende 0109, 0196, 0198,

0213, 0287, 0343

Oceanic 0163, 0215, 0361

Optimus 0250

Optonica 0093

Orion 0037, 0294, 0320,

0321, 0235

Osaki 0217, 0218, 0072,

0264, 0032

Oso 0218

Osume 0072, 0032, 0157

Otake 0317

Otto Versand 0037, 0217,

0320, 0036,

0010, 0554,

0191, 0213,

0343, 0349

Palladium 0370, 0418

Panama 0217, 0264

Panasonic 0250, 0163, 0213,

0214, 0226, 0367

Pathe Cinema 0216, 0320,

0213, 0238

Pathe Marconi 0196, 0198,

0205, 0333

Pausa 0009

Penney 0032

Perdio 0320

Phase 0032

Philco 0074, 0076, 0084,

0213, 0247

Philips 0037, 0374, 0554,

0012, 0043, 0323

Phonola 0037, 0012

Pioneer 0109, 0163, 0287

Profex 0009, 0076, 0361

Proline 0321

Protech 0037, 0217, 0418,

0009, 0264, 0102,

0431, 0247, 0337

Pye 0012

LIST OF MANUFACTURERS’ CODES (Australia model)

LISTES DES CODES FABRICANT (Modèle pour l’Australie)

03RX-V595a-CODE(EU) 6/24/99, 11:51 AM105

106

Tensai 0218, 0294, 0320, 0317

Texet 0216, 0218

Thomson 0109, 0196, 0198,

0205, 0287, 0333,

0343, 0349

Thorn 0037, 0072, 0035, 0074,

0084, 0190, 0192, 0361

Thorn-Ferguson 0343

Tomashi 0282

Toshiba 0036, 0035, 0070, 0243

Trical 0157

Triumph 0243

Uher 0206, 0320, 0303

Ultra 0192

Ultravox 0102

Universum 0037, 0370, 0264,

0105, 0346

Vestel 0037

Victor 0053

Videosat 0247

Videotechnic 0217

Vidtech 0036

Vision 0320

Voxson 0163

Waltham 0217

Watson 0037, 0320

Watt Radio 0102

Wega 0036

White Westinghouse 0037, 0216,

0320

Yoko 0037, 0217, 0264, 0431

Zanussi 0206

CABLE

ABC 1003, 1008, 1014, 1017

Birgmingham Cable

Communications 1276

British Telecom 1003, 1105

Cabletime 1161, 1271, 1377

Clyde 1086

Contec 1019

Decsat 1423

Filmnet 1443

France Telecom 1451

GEC 1086

General Instrument 1276

GoldStar 1144

Jerrold 1003, 1276, 1014

MNet 1443, 1019

Magnavox 1032

Memorex 1000

Movie Time 1156

NSC 1156

Oak 1019

PVP Stereo Visual Matrix 1003

Panasonic 1000

Paragon 1000

Pioneer 1144, 1260

Pulsar 1000

Runco 1000

STS 1156

Salora 1382

Samsung 1144

Satbox 1375

Scientific Atlanta 1008, 1277,

1017

Starcom 1003

Tele+1 1443

Teleservice 1281

Toshiba 1000

Tudi 1286

United Cable 1003

Videoway 1250

Westminster 1105

Zenith 1000

DBS TUNER

AST 2321, 2351

Alba 2455, 2421, 2362, 2613

Aldes 2288

Allantide 2333

Amstrad 2080, 2252, 2345,

2461, 2501

Ankaro 2369, 2288, 2220,

2519, 2217

Anttron 2421, 2183

Arcon 2368

Armstrong 2243

Astra 2108, 2539

Astro 2520, 2173, 2358, 2501

Avalon 2396

Axis 2369, 2530

BT 2668

Barcom 2217

Beko 2189

Best 2369, 2217

Blaupunkt 2173

Boca 2243, 2513

Brain Wave 2332

Bush 2067

CNT 2520

Cambridge 2344

Channel Master 2362

Chaparral 2053, 2209

CityCom 2394

Commlink 2288

Connexions 2396

Crown 2243

Cyrus 2200

D-box 2723

DDC 2362

DNT 2396, 2200

Diskxpress 2217

Drake 2268

EIF 2417

Echostar 2396, 2871

Emanon 2421

FTE 2331

Ferguson 2183, 2067,

2189, 2336

Fidelity 2252

Finlux 2455, 2108, 2344, 2397

Fracarro 2871

Freecom 2421, 2335

Fuba 2421, 2369, 2396,

2217, 2297, 2417

G-Sat 2183

Galaxis 2288, 2834, 2863

Galaxisat 2321

GoldStar 2335

Gooding 2571

Goodmans 2189

Grothusen 2335

Grundig 2571, 2173,

2189, 2328

Harting und Helling 2333

Hinari 2183

Hirschmann 2502, 2173, 2573,

2287, 2333,

2397, 2398

Hitachi 2455

Houston 2668

Huth 2243, 2288, 2220, 2346

ITT 2108

InVideo 2871

Intervision 2592

JVC 2571

Johansson 2332

Kathrein 2173, 2200, 2092,

2331, 2358, 2394,

2442, 2480, 2504

Kosmos 2331, 2335

Kreiselmeyer 2173

Kyostar 2421

La Sat 2520, 2513, 2464

Lemon 2692

Lenco 2421, 2335

Lennox 2592

Lupus 2369

Luxor 2573, 2108

Manhattan 2455, 2592, 2520

Marantz 2200

Maspro 2092, 2328, 2336

Matsui 2571, 2344

Mediamarkt 2243

Micro Technology 2333, 2539

Minerva 2571

Morgan’s 2243, 2513

Multistar 2331, 2464

Muratto 2335

Navex 2332

Neuhaus 2501

Neusat 2692, 2834

Newhaus 2220

Nikko 2360

Nokia 2455, 2573, 2108,

2328, 2397, 2873

Nordmende 2362

Orbitech 2501

Oxford 2344

Pace 2455, 2183, 2067,

2328, 2336, 2791

Palcom 2297

Palladium 2571

Palsat 2501

Panda 2455

Philips 2455, 2571, 2200,

2292, 2328

Phonotrend 2288, 2592

Planet 2871

Plasmatic 2442

Polytron 2394

Promax 2455

Prosat 2288

Quadral 2362, 2519

RFT 2288, 2220, 2200

Radiola 2200

Radix 2396, 2882

SAT 2321, 2351, 2461

SEG 2421, 2369, 2539

STVI 2417

Saba 2520, 2336

Sabre 2455

Sagem 2820

Salora 2108

Samsung 2287

SatPartner 2421, 2332, 2520,

2502, 2335, 2692

Satcom 2605, 2346

Satec 2183, 2328

Satmaster 2346

Schwaiger 2183, 2394, 2504

Seemann 2396, 2530

Siemens 2173

Skymaster 2288, 2605, 2519

Star Trak 2421

Strong 2421

Sunstar 2513

TPS 2820

Tantec 2455, 2297, 2336

TechniSat 2262, 2501

Techniland 2346

Telefunken 2421

Teleka 2243, 2613

Telesat 2605

Thomson 2455

Tonna 2668, 2346

Triad 2321, 2333, 2335, 2351

Triasat 2501

Unitor 2332, 2217

Universum 2571, 2173

Vector 2333

Ventana 2200

Vortec 2421

Vtech 2351

Wevasat 2333

Winersat 2332

Wisi 2455, 2396, 2173, 2321,

2351, 2372, 2406, 2407

XSat 2889

Xcom Multimedia 2889

Zehnder 2520, 2321, 2331

VCR

ASA 3037, 3081

Admiral 3048

Adventura 3000

Aiko 3278

Aiwa 3000, 3037, 3307,

3348, 3352

Akai 3315, 3106, 3041, 3053

Akiba 3072

Alba 3072, 3020, 3278,

3209, 3315, 3352

Ambassador 3020

Amstrad 3000, 3278,

3325, 3332

Anitech 3072

Asha 3240

Asuka 3037

Audiovox 3037

Baird 3000, 3041, 3104, 3107

Basic Line 3072, 3020, 3278

Beaumark 3240

Bell & Howell 3104

Blaupunkt 3034, 3226, 3195,

3003, 3006, 3154,

3162, 3227, 3403

Brandt 3320, 3187, 3321

Brandt Electronic 3041

Broksonic 3209

Bush 3072, 3278, 3209, 3352

CCE 3072, 3278

CGE 3000

Calix 3037

Capehart 3020

Carver 3081

Catron 3020

Cimline 3072

Cineral 3278

Citizen 3037, 3278

Clatronic 3020

Colt 3072

Combitech 3352

Condor 3020

Craig 3072, 3037, 3047, 3240

Crown 3072, 3020, 3278

Curtis Mathes 3041, 3162

Cybernex 3240

Cyrus 3081

Daewoo 3020, 3278, 3045

Dansai 3072

Daytron 3020

De Graaf 3042, 3166

Decca 3000, 3081

Denon 3042

Dual 3041

Dumont 3000, 3081, 3104

Dynatech 3000

ESC 3278, 3240

Elbe 3038

Elcatech 3072

Electrohome 3037

Electrophonic 3037

Emerex 3032

Emerson 3000, 3037, 3278,

3209, 3036,

3043, 3088

Ferguson 3320, 3041,

3107, 3321

Fidelity 3000

Finlandia 3081, 3104

Finlux 3000, 3081, 3042, 3104

Firstline 3072, 3037, 3209,

3045, 3043

Fisher 3046, 3047, 3054, 3104

Frontech 3020

Fuji 3033

Funai 3000

GE 3048, 3240

GEC 3081

Garrard 3000

General 3020

Go Video 3432

GoldHand 3072

GoldStar 3037, 3038, 3225

Goodmans 3072, 3000, 3020,

3037, 3278, 3403

Gradiente 3000, 3008

Graetz 3005, 3041, 3104, 3240

Granada 3081, 3046, 3104

Grandin 3072, 3000, 3037

Grundig 3072, 3081, 3347,

3226, 3195, 3003,

3006, 3007, 3207,

3349, 3403

HCM 3072

HI-Q 3047

Hanseatic 3037

Harley Davidson 3000

Harman/Kardon 3038

Harwood 3072

Headquarter 3046

Hinari 3072, 3004, 3240, 3352

Hitachi 3000, 3004, 3042, 3041,

3166, 3235, 3240

Hypson 3072

ITT 3106, 3046, 3384, 3005,

3041, 3104, 3240

ITV 3037, 3278

Imperial 3000

Ingersol 3004

Interfunk 3081

JVC 3067, 3384, 3008, 3041,

3206, 3207, 3486

03RX-V595a-CODE(EU) 6/24/99, 11:51 AM106

107

Micromega 6157

Mission 6157

Mitsubishi 6108, 6156

NAD 6000

NSM 6157

Naim 6157

Nikko 6525, 6164

Onkyo 6101, 6102

Optimus 6000, 6032, 6037,

6536, 6048, 6179,

6196, 6342

Panasonic 6303, 6029, 6367

Philips 6157, 6274, 6287

Pioneer 6032

Poppy 6164

Proton 6157

QED 6157

Quad 6157

Quasar 6029

RCA 6179

Realistic 6164, 6179

Revox 6157, 6113

Roadstar 6461, 6525, 6527

Rotel 6157

SAE 6157

Sansui 6157, 6202, 6513

Sanyo 6048, 6179, 6342

Schneider 6134

Scott 6164

Sharp 6037, 6262, 6265

Sherwood 6114, 6196

Siemens 6516

Signature 6108

Sony 6000, 6490

Teac 6378

Technics 6207, 6303, 6029

Toshiba 6481

Universum 6157

Victor 6072

Wards 6157, 6108

Yamaha 6036, 6082,

6187, 6712

Yorx 6461

MD RECORDER

Kenwood 7826

Sony 7490

Yamaha 7888, 7490

TAPE DECK

Aiwa 8029, 8197, 8200

Akai 8188, 8189

Arcam 8076

Carver 8029

Denon 8076, 8412

Fisher 8074

Grundig 8029

Harman/Kardon 8182

JVC 8244, 8273, 8274

Kenwood 8070, 8071, 8092,

8205, 8233, 8234

Magnavox 8029

Marantz 8029, 8009

Memorex 8099, 8101

Mitsubishi 8189

Onkyo 8136, 8135

Optimus 8027, 8220

Panasonic 8229

Philips 8029

Pioneer 8027, 8099, 8101, 8220

Revox 8029

Sansui 8029, 8009

Sanyo 8074

Sharp 8205

Sony 8170, 8243

Technics 8229

Victor 8273, 8274

Wards 8027

Yamaha 8094, 8097, 8205,

8478, 8524

Jensen 3041

KEC 3037, 3278

KLH 3072

Kaisui 3072

Kendo 3209, 3106

Kenwood 3067, 3384,

3038, 3041

Kodak 3037

Korpel 3072

LXI 3037

Lenco 3278

Leyco 3072

LIoyd’s 3000

Loewe 3037, 3004, 3081, 3006

Logik 3072, 3004, 3240

Luxor 3106, 3048, 3046,

3043, 3104

M Electronic 3000

MGA 3043, 3240

MGN Technology 3240

MTC 3000, 3240

Magnasonic 3278

Magnavox 3000, 3081

Magnin 3240

Manesth 3072, 3045

Marantz 3081, 3003, 3006

Marta 3037

Matsui 3209, 3004, 3036,

3088, 3348, 3352

Matsushita 3162

Memorex 3000, 3037, 3048,

3046, 3047, 3104,

3162, 3240, 3307

Memphis 3072

Metz 3347, 3195, 3003,

3006, 3162, 3227

Minerva 3195, 3006

Minolta 3042

Mitsubishi 3081, 3067,

3048, 3043

Motorola 3048

Multitech 3072, 3000

Murphy 3000

NEC 3067, 3038, 3041, 3104

Neckermann 3081

Nesco 3072

Nikko 3037

Nikon 3034

Noblex 3240

Nokia 3106, 3046, 3041,

3104, 3240

Nordmende 3320, 3384, 3041,

3297, 3321

Oceanic 3000, 3041

Okano 3315, 3348

Olympus 3226

Optimus 3037, 3432, 3048,

3104, 3162

Orion 3209, 3004, 3036,

3088, 3348, 3352

Osaki 3072, 3000, 3037

Otto Versand 3081

Palladium 3072, 3037,

3006, 3041

Panasonic 3226, 3162,

3225, 3227

Pathe Cinema 3036

Pathe Marconi 3041

Penney 3037, 3042, 3038,

3054, 3240

Pentax 3042

Perdio 3000

Philco 3209, 3038

Philips 3081, 3384, 3403

Phonola 3081

Pilot 3037

Pioneer 3081, 3067, 3162, 3235

Portland 3020

Profex 3322

Profitronic 3240

Proline 3000

Protec 3072

Pye 3081

Quarter 3046

Quartz 3046

Quasar 3162

Quelle 3081

RCA 3106, 3042, 3048, 3240

RFT 3403

Radio Shack 3000, 3037

Radiola 3081

Radix 3037

Randex 3037

Realistic 3000, 3037, 3048,

3046, 3047, 3104

Rex 3384, 3041

Ricoh 3034

Roadstar 3072, 3037,

3278, 3240

SBR 3081

SEG 3322, 3240

SEI 3004, 3081

STS 3042

Saba 3320, 3384, 3041, 3206,

3207, 3297, 3321

Saisho 3209, 3004, 3036, 3088

Salora 3106, 3046, 3043

Samsung 3432, 3045,

3053, 3240

Sanky 3048

Sansui 3000, 3067, 3041

Sanyo 3046, 3047, 3104, 3240

Saville 3352

Schaub Lorenz 3000, 3005,

3041, 3104

Schneider 3072, 3000, 3081

Scott 3045, 3043

Sears 3000, 3037, 3042, 3046,

3047, 3054, 3104

Seleco 3041

Semp 3045

Sentra 3020

Sharp 3048

Shintom 3072, 3104

Shogun 3240

Shorai 3004

Siemens 3037, 3081, 3195,

3003, 3006,

3054, 3104

Silva 3037

Singer 3072, 3045

Sinudyne 3004, 3081

Solavox 3020

Sonolor 3046

Sontec 3037

Sony 3000, 3032, 3033,

3034, 3011

Sunkai 3348

Sunstar 3000

Suntronic 3000

Sylvania 3000, 3081, 3043

Symphonic 3000

TMK 3036, 3240

Tashiko 3000

Tatung 3000, 3081, 3041

Teac 3000, 3041

Tec 3020

Technics 3226, 3162

Teknika 3000, 3037

Teleavia 3041

Telefunken 3320, 3384, 3041,

3187, 3321

Tenosal 3072

Tensai 3322, 3000

Thomas 3000

Thomson 3320, 3384, 3041

Thorn 3036, 3041, 3104

Toshiba 3081, 3045, 3384,

3041, 3043

Totevision 3037, 3240

Towada 3322

Uher 3240

Unitech 3240

Universum 3000, 3037, 3081,

3106, 3195, 3006,

3240, 3325

Vector 3045

Vector Research 3038

Video Concepts 3045

Videosonic 3240

Wards 3072, 3000, 3081, 3042,

3048, 3047, 3240

White Westinghouse 3278

XR-1000 3072, 3000

Yamaha 3038

Yamishi 3072

Yokan 3072

Yoko 3020, 3240

Zenith 3000, 3033, 3034

DVD PLAYER

Kenwood 4534

Magnavox 4503

Onkyo 4503

Panasonic 4490

Philips 4539, 4503

Pioneer 4525

Sony 4533

Technics 4490

Thomson 4551

Toshiba 4503

Yamaha 4490, 4545

Zenith 4503

LD PLAYER

Aiwa 5203

Carver 5064, 5194

Cyrus 5388

Denon 5059, 5172

Disco Vision 5023

Funai 5203

Hitachi 5023

Magnavox 5194, 5217

Marantz 5064, 5194

Mitsubishi 5059

NAD 5059

Panasonic 5204, 5496

Philips 5064, 5388, 5194

Pioneer 5023, 5059

Quasar 5204

Radiola 5388

Realistic 5203

Salora 5064

Sega 5023

Sharp 5001

Sony 5193, 5201

Technics 5204, 5496

Telefunken 5059

Theta Digital 5194

Thorn 5014

Yamaha 5217

CD PLAYER

Aiwa 6124, 6157, 6419

Akai 6108, 6156, 6199

Alba 6536, 6288, 6334

Arcam 6157

Audio Research 6157

Audio Ton 6157

Audiolab 6157

Audiomeca 6157

BSR 6134

Bestar 6164

Binatone 6452

California Audio Lab 6029

Carver 6157, 6179

Condor 6134, 6164

Cyrus 6157

DKK 6000

Denon 6003, 6034

Dual 6196

Emerson 6164

Fisher 6048, 6179, 6342

GE 6334

Genexxa 6032, 6164

GoldStar 6525, 6383

Goodmans 6536

Grundig 6157

Harman/Kardon 6108, 6173

Hitachi 6032, 6291

JVC 6072

Kenwood 6037, 6523, 6028,

6048, 6190

Kodak 6287

Krell 6157

Linn 6157

Luxman 6328

M Electronic 6525

MCS 6029

Magnavox 6157, 6038, 6129

Marantz 6157, 6029,

6038, 6129

Matsui 6157, 6288, 6307

Mclntosh 6287

Memorex 6032, 6164

Meridian 6157

03RX-V595a-CODE(EU) 6/24/99, 11:51 AM107

108

LIST OF MANUFACTURERS’ CODES (U.S.A, Canada and China models)

LISTES DES CODES FABRICANT (Modèles pour les Etats-Unis, le Canada et la Chine)

A-Mark 0003

AOC 0030, 0019, 0003,

0052, 0185

Abex 0032

Acura 0009

Admiral 0093

Adventura 0046

Adyson 0032

Aiko 0092

Akai 0030, 0208

Akura 0264

Alaron 0179, 0216

Alba 0009, 0037

Ambassador 0177

Amstrad 0009, 0171, 0177

Anam 0180, 0004, 0009, 0068

Anam National 0161

Anitech 0009, 0068

Arcam 0216

Archer 0003

Audinac 0391

Audiosonic 0037, 0109

Audiovox 0451, 0180,

0003, 0092

BPL 0282

Basic Line 0009

Baur 0037, 0512, 0535, 0554

Baysonic 0180

Belcor 0019

Bell & Howell 0154, 0016

Beon 0037

Blaupunkt 0535, 0554

Blue Star 0282

Bradford 0180

Brandt 0109

Britannia 0216

Brockwood 0019

Broksonic 0236, 0463,

0003, 0426

Bush 0282, 0009, 0037

CCE 0037

CS Electronics 0216

CXC 0180

Candle 0030, 0056, 0046, 0186

Carnivale 0030

Carver 0054, 0170

Cascade 0009

Cathay 0037

Celebrity 0000

Centurion 0037

Cimline 0009

Cineral 0451, 0092

Citizen 0060, 0030, 0056, 0039,

0046, 0092, 0186, 0280

Clairtone 0185

Clarivox 0037

Concerto 0056

Contec 0180, 0009, 0185, 0216

Craig 0180, 0161

Crosley 0054

Crown 0180, 0039, 0009,

0037, 0418

Curtis Mathes 0047, 0054,

0154, 0051,

0451, 0093,

0060, 0030,

0145, 0056,

0016, 0039,

0166

Daewoo 0451, 0019, 0039,

0009, 0037,

0066, 0092

Dansai 0037

Dayton 0009

Daytron 0019

De Graaf 0208

Decca 0037

Denon 0145

Dixi 0004, 0009, 0037

Dumont 0017, 0019

Ectec 0391

Electroband 0000, 0185

Elin 0037

Elta 0009

Emerson 0154, 0236, 0463,

0180, 0282, 0178,

0019, 0179, 0039,

0177, 0185, 0280

Envision 0030

Erres 0037

Ferguson 0037, 0109,

0287, 0560

Fidelity 0216

Finlandia 0208

Finlux 0179, 0037

Firstline 0009, 0216

Fisher 0154, 0159, 0208

Formenti 0037

Frontech 0264

Fujitsu 0179

Funai 0180, 0179, 0171, 0264

Futuretech 0180

GE 0047, 0051, 0451, 0093,

0282, 0178, 0021, 0135

GEC 0037

Geloso 0009

Gibralter 0017, 0030, 0019

GoldStar 0030, 0178, 0019,

0056, 0001, 0002,

0032, 0037, 0109

Goodmans 0179, 0037

Gradiente 0053, 0056, 0170

Granada 0037, 0208,

0339, 0502

Grandin 0282

Grundig 0037, 0535, 0554

Grunpy 0180, 0179

HCM 0282, 0009

Hallmark 0178

Hanseatic 0037

Harley Davidson 0179

Harvard 0180, 0068

Hinari 0179, 0009, 0037, 0283

Hisawa 0282

Hitachi 0145, 0056, 0032,

0109, 0151, 0576

Huanyu 0216

Hypson 0282, 0037, 0264

ICE 0264

ITT 0283

Imperial 0418

Indiana 0037

Infinity 0054

Inteq 0017

Interbuy 0068

Interfunk 0037, 0512

Intervision 0037, 0068, 0264

JBL 0054

JCB 0000

JEC 0502

JVC 0053, 0069, 0160

Janeil 0046

KEC 0180

KTV 0180, 0030, 0039,

0185, 0280

Kaisui 0282, 0009, 0216

Kamp 0216

Kawasho 0216

Kaypani 0052

Kendo 0037

Kenwood 0030, 0019

Kingsley 0216

Kloss 0046

Korpel 0037

Koyoda 0009

LG 0056

LXI 0047, 0054, 0154,

0156, 0178

Leyco 0037, 0264

Liesenk & Tter 0037

Lloytron 0032

Loewe 0512

Logik 0016, 0001

Luxman 0056

M Electronic 0009, 0037, 0068,

0109, 0287

MEI 0185

MGA 0150, 0030, 0178, 0019

MTC 0060, 0030, 0019, 0056,

0185, 0216, 0512

Magnavox 0054, 0030, 0179,

0186, 0187

Majestic 0016

Manesth 0264

Marantz 0054, 0030, 0037

Mark 0037

Matsui 0009, 0035, 0037,

0177, 0208

Matsushita 0250

Mediator 0037

Megatron 0178, 0145, 0003

Memorex 0154, 0250, 0150,

0178, 0056,

0016, 0009

Metz 0535

Midland 0047, 0017, 0051,

0039, 0032, 0135

Minerva 0535, 0554

Minutz 0021

Mitsubishi 0093, 0150, 0178,

0019, 0512, 0535

Mivar 0216

Motorola 0093

Multitech 0180, 0009, 0216

NAD 0156, 0178, 0166

NEC 0030, 0019, 0056, 0170

NEI 0037

NTC 0092

Neckermann 0037, 0554

Nesco 0179

Nikkai 0032, 0035, 0037,

0216, 0264

Nikko 0030, 0178, 0092

Nisato 0391

Nordmende 0109, 0287, 0560

Noshi 0018

Onwa 0180

Optimus 0154, 0250, 0166

Optonica 0093, 0165

Orion 0236, 0463, 0179,

0037, 0177

Osaki 0032, 0264

Osume 0032

Otto Versand 0037, 0512,

0535, 0554

Palladium 0418

Panama 0264

Panasonic 0051, 0250, 0226

Pathe Cinema 0216

Pausa 0009

Penney 0047, 0156, 0051,

0060, 0030, 0178,

0021, 0019, 0018,

0056, 0039, 0002,

0003, 0032,

0135, 0149

Phase 0032

Philco 0054, 0463, 0030,

0145, 0019

Philips 0054, 0037, 0554

Phonola 0037

Pilot 0030, 0019, 0039

Pioneer 0109, 0166, 0287

Portland 0019, 0039, 0092

Prism 0051

Profex 0009

Proscan 0047

Protech 0009, 0037, 0264, 0418

Proton 0178, 0003, 0052

Pulsar 0017, 0019

Quasar 0051, 0250, 0165

Quelle 0037, 0252, 0512,

0535, 0554

R-Line 0037

RCA 0047, 0051, 0093, 0019,

0018, 0090, 0135

Radio Shack 0047, 0154, 0165,

0180, 0030, 0178,

0019, 0056,

0039, 0032

Radiola 0037

Realistic 0154, 0165, 0180,

0030, 0178, 0019,

0056, 0039, 0032

Revox 0037

Rex 0264

Rhapsody 0185, 0216

Roadstar 0009, 0264, 0418

Runco 0017, 0030

SBR 0037

SEG 0264

SEI 0177

SSS 0180, 0019

Saba 0109, 0287

Saisho 0009, 0177, 0264

Sampo 0030, 0039, 0032, 0052

Samsung 0060, 0030, 0178,

0019, 0056, 0039,

0009, 0032, 0037,

0090, 0264, 0427

Samsux 0039

Sandra 0216

Sansei 0451

Sansui 0463

Sanyo 0154, 0159, 0208, 0339

Schneider 0037

Scimitsu 0019

Scotch 0178

Scott 0236, 0180, 0178,

0019, 0179

Sears 0047, 0054, 0154, 0156,

0178, 0179, 0056, 0149,

0159, 0171

Semivox 0180

Semp 0156

Sentra 0035, 0283

Sharp 0093, 0165, 0039

Shogun 0019

Siemens 0037, 0535, 0554

Signature 0016

Simpson 0186, 0187

Sinudyne 0177

Solavox 0032

Sonitron 0208

Sonoko 0009, 0037

Sonolor 0208

Sontec 0037

Sony 0000, 0080

Soundesign 0180, 0178,

0179, 0186

Soundwave 0037, 0418

Spectricon 0003

Squareview 0171

Standard 0009

Starlite 0180

Supra 0056

Supre-Macy 0046

Supreme 0000

Sylvania 0054, 0030

Symphonic 0171

Sysline 0037

TMK 0178, 0056, 0177

Tandy 0093

Tatung 0003, 0037

Technics 0051, 0250

Technol Ace 0179

Techwood 0051, 0056, 0003

Teknika 0054, 0180, 0150,

0060, 0019, 0179,

0056, 0016, 0039,

0092, 0186

Telefunken 0056, 0109, 0252

Teletech 0009

Teleton 0186

Texet 0216

Thomson 0109, 0287

Thorn 0035, 0037, 0512, 0535

Tomashi 0282

Toshiba 0154, 0156, 0060,

0035, 0149, 0502

Tosonic 0185

Totevision 0039

Triumph 0177

Ultra 0391

Universum 0037, 0264, 0535

Vector Research 0030

Vestel 0037

Victor 0053

Vidikron 0054

03RX-V595a-CODE(US) 6/24/99, 11:51 AM108

109

Vidtech 0178, 0019

Viking 0046

Wards 0054, 0165, 0030, 0178,

0021, 0019, 0179, 0056,

0016, 0080

Watson 0037

White Westinghouse 0037, 0216

Yamaha 0030, 0019

Yoko 0037, 0264

Zenith 0017, 0016, 0092

Zonda 0003

CABLE

ABC 1003, 1008, 1014, 1011

Allegro 1315

Archer 1797

BBT 1267

Belcor 1056

British Telecom 1003

Cable Star 1056

Citizen 1315

Colour Voice 1031

Comtronics 1040

Contec 1019

Emerson 1797

Everquest 1015, 1040

Focus 1400

GC Electronics 1056

Gemini 1015

General Instrument 1476, 1011

GoldStar 1144, 1040

Goodmind 1797

Hamlin 1020, 1259, 1009, 1034

Hitachi 1011

Jasco 1315

Jerrold 1003, 1012, 1476, 1014,

1015, 1011, 1024

MNet 1019

Magnavox 1027

Memorex 1000

Movie Time 1063

NSC 1063

Novaplex 1618

Oak 1019

Optimus 1021

PVP Stereo Visual Matrix 1003

Panasonic 1000, 1107, 1021

Paragon 1000

Philips 1027, 1031

Pioneer 1144, 1533

Popular Mechanics 1400

Prelude 1770

Pulsar 1000

RCA 1021

Radio Shack 1015, 1315

Recoton 1400

Regal 1020, 1259

Rembrandt 1011

Runco 1000

SL Marx 1040

Samsung 1144, 1040

Scientific Atlanta 1008, 1477

Signal 1015, 1040

Signature 1011

Sprucer 1021

StarSight 1422

Starcom 1003, 1015

Stargate 1015, 1040, 1770, 1797

Starquest 1015

TV86 1063

TeleCaption 1221

Teleview 1040

Timeless 1418

Tocom 1012

Toshiba 1000

Tusa 1015

United Cable 1003

Universal 1056, 1191

Viewstar 1063, 1027

Zenith 1000, 1054, 1525

Zentek 1400

DBS TUNER

AST 2321

Audio Ton 2364

Avalon 2396

Chaparral 2053, 2209

Connexions 2396

DNT 2396

Echostar 2396

Elta 2364

Expressvu 2775

Fuba 2396

Galaxis 2364

Galaxisat 2321

General Instrument 2361

Huth 2364

JSR 2364

JVC 2775

Jerrold 2361

Lemon 2692

NEC 2507

Neusat 2692

Next-Wave 2732

Primestar 2361

Radix 2396

SAT 2321

SatPartner 2692

Seemann 2396

Triad 2321

Wisi 2321, 2396

Zehnder 2321

(DSS)

AlphaStar 2772

Echostar 2775

General Instrument 2869

HTS 2775

Hitachi 2819

Hughes Network System 2749

Jerrold 2627

Magnavox 2724

Memorex 2724

Panasonic 2701

Philips 2724

Primestar 2627

RCA 2566

Sony 2639

Star Choice 2869

Toshiba 2790

Uniden 2724

VCR

ASA 3037, 3081

Admiral 3048

Adventura 3000

Aiko 3278

Aiwa 3037, 3000

Akai 3041, 3061, 3281, 3288

Akiba 3072

Akura 3271

Alba 3209, 3072, 3278,

3020, 3295

Ambassador 3020

American High 3035

Amstrad 3000, 3278

Anitech 3072

Asha 3240

Asuka 3037

Audiovox 3037

Baird 3000, 3104, 3041

Basic Line 3072, 3278, 3020

Beaumark 3240

Bell & Howell 3104

Blaupunkt 3162, 3034, 3195,

3226, 3227

Brandt 3187, 3320

Brandt Electronic 3041

Broksonic 3184, 3121, 3209,

3002, 3295,

3361, 3479

Bush 3209, 3072, 3278

CCE 3072, 3278

CGE 3000

Calix 3037

Canon 3035

Capehart 3020

Carver 3081

Catron 3020

Cimline 3072

Cineral 3278

Citizen 3037, 3278

Clatronic 3020

Colt 3072

Condor 3020

Craig 3037, 3047, 3240,

3072, 3271

Crown 3072, 3278, 3020

Curtis Mathes 3060, 3035,

3041, 3162

Cybernex 3240

Cyrus 3081

Daewoo 3045, 3278, 3020

Dansai 3072

Daytron 3020

De Graaf 3042, 3166

Decca 3081, 3000

Denon 3042

Dual 3041

Dumont 3081, 3000, 3104

Dynatech 3000

ESC 3240, 3278

Elbe 3038

Elcatech 3072

Electrohome 3037

Electrophonic 3037

Emerex 3032

Emerson 3037, 3184, 3000,

3121, 3043, 3209,

3002, 3278, 3036,

3061, 3068, 3208,

3212, 3295,

3361, 3479

Ferguson 3041, 3320

Fidelity 3000

Finlandia 3081, 3104

Finlux 3081, 3000, 3042, 3104

Firstline 3037, 3045, 3043,

3209, 3072

Fisher 3047, 3104, 3046,

3054, 3066

Frontech 3020

Fuji 3035, 3033

Funai 3000

GE 3060, 3035, 3048,

3240, 3202

GEC 3081

Garrard 3000

General 3020

GoldHand 3072

GoldStar 3037, 3038,

3225, 3471

Goodmans 3037, 3000, 3072,

3278, 3062, 3020

Gradiente 3000, 3008

Graetz 3240, 3104, 3041

Granada 3081, 3104, 3046

Grandin 3037, 3000, 3072

Grundig 3081, 3072,

3195, 3226

HCM 3072

HI-Q 3047

Hanseatic 3037

Harley Davidson 3000

Harman/Kardon 3038

Harwood 3072, 3068

Headquarter 3046

Hinari 3240, 3072, 3208

Hitachi 3240, 3000, 3042,

3041, 3166, 3235

Hypson 3072

ITT 3240, 3104, 3041,

3046, 3384

ITV 3037, 3278

Imperial 3000

Interfunk 3081

JVC 3067, 3041, 3008, 3384

Jensen 3041

KEC 3037, 3278

KLH 3072

Kaisui 3072

Kendo 3209

Kenwood 3067, 3041,

3038, 3384

Kodak 3035, 3037

Korpel 3072

LXI 3037

Lenco 3278

Leyco 3072

LIoyd’s 3000, 3208

Loewe 3037, 3081

Logik 3240, 3072

Luxor 3048, 3104, 3043,

3062, 3046

M Electronic 3000

MEI 3035

MGA 3240, 3043, 3061

MGN Technology 3240

MTC 3240, 3000

Magnasonic 3278

Magnavox 3035, 3039,

3081, 3000

Magnin 3240

Manesth 3045, 3072

Marantz 3035, 3081, 3062, 3295

Marta 3037

Matsui 3209, 3036, 3208, 3295

Matsushita 3035, 3162

Memorex 3035, 3037, 3048,

3039, 3047, 3240,

3000, 3104,

3162, 3046

Memphis 3072

Metz 3162, 3195, 3227

Minerva 3195

Minolta 3042

Mitsubishi 3048, 3081, 3067,

3043, 3061,

3173, 3196

Motorola 3035, 3048

Multitech 3000, 3072

Murphy 3000

NEC 3104, 3067, 3041,

3038, 3040

Neckermann 3081

Nesco 3072

Nikko 3037

Nikon 3034

Noblex 3240

Nokia 3240, 3104, 3041, 3046

Nordmende 3041, 3320, 3384

Oceanic 3000, 3041

Olympus 3035, 3226

Optimus 3037, 3048,

3104, 3162

Optonica 3062

Orion 3184, 3121, 3209, 3002,

3036, 3208, 3295, 3479

Osaki 3037, 3000, 3072

Otto Versand 3081

Palladium 3037, 3041, 3072

Panasonic 3035, 3162, 3225,

3226, 3227

Pathe Cinema 3036

Pathe Marconi 3041

Penney 3035, 3037, 3240, 3042,

3038, 3040, 3054

Pentax 3042

Perdio 3000

Philco 3035, 3209, 3038, 3479

Philips 3035, 3081, 3062, 3384

Phonola 3081

Pilot 3037

Pioneer 3081, 3067, 3162, 3235

Portland 3020

Profitronic 3240

Proline 3000

Proscan 3060, 3202

Protec 3072

Pulsar 3039

Pye 3081

Quarter 3046

Quartz 3046

Quasar 3035, 3162

Quelle 3081

RCA 3060, 3035, 3048,

3240, 3042, 3202

Radio Shack 3037, 3000

Radiola 3081

Radix 3037

Randex 3037

Realistic 3035, 3037, 3048,

3047, 3000, 3104,

3062, 3046, 3066

Rex 3041, 3384

Ricoh 3034

Roadstar 3037, 3240,

3072, 3278

Runco 3039

SBR 3081

03RX-V595a-CODE(US) 6/24/99, 11:51 AM109

110

SEG 3240

SEI 3081

STS 3042

Saba 3041, 3320, 3384

Saisho 3209, 3036, 3208

Salora 3043, 3046

Samsung 3240, 3045

Sanky 3048, 3039

Sansui 3000, 3067, 3041,

3271, 3479

Sanyo 3047, 3240, 3104, 3046

Schaub Lorenz 3000, 3104,

3041

Schneider 3081, 3000, 3072

Scott 3184, 3045, 3121, 3043, 3212

Sears 3035, 3037, 3047,

3000, 3042, 3104,

3046, 3054, 3066

Seleco 3041

Semp 3045

Sentra 3020

Sharp 3048, 3062

Shintom 3104, 3072

Shogun 3240

Siemens 3037, 3081, 3104,

3054, 3195

Silva 3037

Singer 3045, 3072

Sinudyne 3081

Solavox 3020

Sonolor 3046

Sontec 3037

Sony 3035, 3032, 3000,

3033, 3034

Sunstar 3000

Suntronic 3000

Sylvania 3035, 3081,

3000, 3043

Symphonic 3000

TMK 3240, 3036, 3208

Tashiko 3000

Tatung 3081, 3000, 3041

Teac 3000, 3041

Tec 3020

Technics 3035, 3162, 3226

Teknika 3035, 3037, 3000

Teleavia 3041

Telefunken 3041, 3187,

3320, 3384

Tenosal 3072

Tensai 3000

Thomas 3000

Thomson 3041, 3320, 3384

Thorn 3104, 3041, 3036

Toshiba 3081, 3045, 3043, 3041,

3066, 3212, 3366, 3384

Totevision 3037, 3240

Triumph 3208

Uher 3240

Unitech 3240

Universum 3037, 3081, 3240,

3000, 3195

Vector 3045

Vector Research 3038, 3040

Video Concepts 3045, 3040,

3061

Videosonic 3240

Wards 3060, 3035, 3048, 3047,

3081, 3240, 3000, 3042,

3072, 3062, 3212

White Westinghouse 3278

XR-1000 3035, 3000, 3072

Yamaha 3038

Yamishi 3072

Yokan 3072

Yoko 3240, 3020

Zenith 3039, 3000, 3033, 3034

DVD PLAYER

JVC 4558

Kenwood 4534

Magnavox 4503

Mitsubishi 4521

Onkyo 4503

Panasonic 4490

Philips 4503, 4539

Pioneer 4525

Proscan 4522

RCA 4522

Sony 4533

Technics 4490

Toshiba 4503

Yamaha 4490, 4545

Zenith 4503

LD PLAYER

Aiwa 5203

Carver 5064, 5194, 5323

Denon 5059, 5172

Disco Vision 5023

Funai 5203

Hitachi 5023

Magnavox 5194, 5217

Marantz 5064, 5194

Mitsubishi 5059

NAD 5059

Panasonic 5204

Philips 5064, 5194

Pioneer 5059, 5023

Quasar 5204

Realistic 5203

Salora 5064

Samsung 5323

Sega 5023

Sony 5193, 5201

Technics 5204

Telefunken 5059

Theta Digital 5194

Yamaha 5217

CD PLAYER

ADC 6018

Acoustic Research 6420

Adcom 6155

Aiwa 6157, 6012, 6124

Akai 6156

Arcam 6157

Audio Pro 6437

Audio Research 6157

Audio-Technica 6170

Audio Ton 6157

Audiolab 6157

Audiomeca 6157

BSR 6245

Bestar 6164

Burmester 6420

Bush 6245

California Audio Lab 6029

Carver 6157, 6179, 6437

Condor 6164

Crown 6122

Cyrus 6157

DAK 6245

DKK 6000

Denon 6003, 6034

Elektra 6393, 6437

Emerson 6305, 6155, 6164

Fisher 6179, 6048, 6088, 6342

Garrard 6420, 6393, 6245,

6280, 6425

Genexxa 6032, 6305,

6164, 6426

Goodmans 6305, 6245, 6280

Grundig 6157

Harman/Kardon 6426

Hitachi 6032, 6155

JVC 6072

Kenwood 6028, 6037,

6190, 6048

Kodak 6287

Krell 6157

Kyocera 6018

LXI 6305

Linn 6157

Luxman 6093

MCS 6029, 6043

MTC 6420

Magnavox 6157, 6305

Marantz 6029, 6157, 6180

Matsui 6157

Mclntosh 6287

Memorex 6032, 6305, 6155,

6164, 6180

Meridian 6157

Micromega 6157

Mission 6157

Mitsubishi 6156

NAD 6000

NEC 6043

NSM 6157

Nagaoka 6018

Naim 6157

Nakamichi 6147

Nikko 6164, 6170

Onkyo 6101

Optimus 6000, 6032, 6179,

6305, 6037, 6420,

6048, 6145, 6468,

6087, 6280, 6342,

6426, 6437

Panasonic 6029, 6303

Parasound 6420

Philips 6157, 6287

Pioneer 6032, 6305, 6468, 6244

Poppy 6164

Proton 6157

QED 6157

Quad 6157

Quasar 6029

RCA 6179, 6305, 6053, 6155

Realistic 6179, 6420, 6155,

6164, 6180

Revox 6157

Roadstar 6461

Rotel 6157, 6420

Royal 6420

SAE 6157

STS 6018

Sansui 6157, 6305, 6202

Sanyo 6179, 6048, 6087, 6342

Scott 6305, 6155, 6164

Sears 6305

Sharp 6037, 6180, 6261

Sherwood 6114, 6180, 6426

Shure 6043

Sony 6000, 6185

Soundesign 6145, 6425

Tascam 6420

Teac 6420, 6393, 6180

Technics 6029, 6303

Universum 6157, 6437

Victor 6072

Wards 6157, 6053

Yamaha 6036, 6187, 6261,

6082, 6712

Yorx 6461

MD RECORDER

Kenwood 7826

Sony 7490

Yamaha 7888, 7490

TAPE DECK

ADC 8171

Aiwa 8029, 8197

Akai 8283

Arcam 8076

Carver 8029

Denon 8076

Fisher 8074

Garrard 8308, 8309, 8375

GoldStar 8375

Grundig 8029, 8375

JVC 8244, 8274, 8303,

8304, 8310

Kenwood 8071, 8092,

8233, 8234

Kyocera 8171

Magnavox 8029

Marantz 8029, 8009

Memorex 8099

Mitsubishi 8283

Onkyo 8136, 8282

Optimus 8027, 8220, 8337

Panasonic 8229

Philips 8029

Phonotrend 8337

Pioneer 8027, 8220, 8099

Revox 8029, 8190

Sansui 8029, 8009

Sanyo 8074

Sharp 8231

Sherwood 8337

Sonic 8375

Sony 8243, 8170, 8291

Teac 8280, 8289, 8308, 8309

Technics 8229

Universum 8375

Victor 8274

Wards 8027

Yamaha 8097, 8094, 8478, 8524

03RX-V595a-CODE(US) 6/24/99, 11:51 AM110

HTR-5150

Natural Sound AV Receiver

Ampli-Tuner audio-vidéo

OWNER’S MANUAL

MODE D’EMPLOI

HTR-5150

Printed in Malaysia ID

V403350

U C A T

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.

YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA

YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY

YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND

YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN

YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA

04HTR-5150-e/f cv1/4 6/28/99, 2:31 PM1

Quick Reference Card

AMP/TUN

DSP

TAPE/MD CD DVD/LD

POWER

INPUT

EXT. DEC.

A/B/C/D/E

DSP

PRESET

UP DOWN

VOLUME

MUTE

SLEEP

TV POWER

TIME/LEVEL

DSP program

STANDBY

SELECTOR

DIAL

TEST

EFFECT

ON/OFF

TV VOLUME

POWER

TV POWER

REC/PAUSE

PLAY

DIR A (TAPE)

SKIP (MD)

REWIND (TAPE)

SEARCH (MD)

INPUT

TV VOLUME

DISPLAY (MD)

PAUSE (MD)

DECK A/B (TAPE)

DIR B (TAPE)

SKIP (MD)

STOP

FAST

FORWARD (TAPE)

SEARCH (MD)

POWER

TV POWER

PLAY

SUBTITLE

ON/OFF (DVD)

SKIP/SEARCH

SUBTITLE (DVD)

SEARCH (LD)

INPUT

TV VOLUME

DISPLAY

PAUSE

TV INPUT

STOP

ANGLE (DVD)

SEARCH (LD)

AUDIO (DVD)

POWER

TV POWER

DISC SKIP DISC SKIP

PLAY

SKIP

INPUT

TV VOLUME

PAUSE

TV INPUT

STOP

DISPLAY

SET MENU

V404530

VCR CBL/DBS TVDVD MENU

TV POWER

VCR REC (*1)

PLAY

REWIND

CHANNEL

POWER

CHANNEL

ENTER

CHANNEL

UP DOWN

CHANNEL

ENTER

CHANNEL

UP DOWN

CHANNEL

ENTER

CHANNEL

UP DOWN

TV VOLUME

DISPLAY

PAUSE

TV INPUT

STOP

FAST FORWARD

POWER

TV POWER

+10

DISC SKIP

MENU SELECT

MENU LEFT

SET UP

TITLE

Numeric

buttons

TV VOLUME

CLEAR

TITLE/INDEX

MENU UP

TV INPUT

MENU RIGHT

MENU DOWN

RETURN

TV POWER

TV MUTE

TV SLEEP

VCR PLAY

VCR REC (*1)

VCR REWIND

CHANNEL

TV VOLUME

TV EFFECT

ON/OFF

DISPLAY

VCR PAUSE

TV INPUT

VCR STOP

VCR FAST

FORWARD

POWER

TV POWER

MENU SELECT

MENU LEFT

CHANNEL

TV VOLUME

+100

MENU UP

MENU RIGHT

TV INPUT

DISPLAY

MENU DOWN

RECALL

POWER

*1: Press this button twice to start recording.

*1: Appuyer deux fois sur cette touche pour démarrer l’enregistrement.

*1: Diese Taste zweimal drücken, um die Aufnahme zu starten.

*1: Tryck två gånger på denna knapp för att starta inspelningen.

*1: Premere due volte questo tasto per iniziare la registrazione.

*1: Presione dos veces este botón para empezar a grabar.

*1: Druk tweemaal op deze toets om met opnemen te beginnen.

Quick Reference Card

V404530

Documenttranscriptie

U C AT HTR-5150 HTR-5150 Natural Sound AV Receiver Ampli-Tuner audio-vidéo YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA OWNER’S MANUAL MODE D’EMPLOI ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA Printed in Malaysia ID 04HTR-5150-e/f cv1/4 1 V403350 6/28/99, 2:31 PM SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 8 Ventilation – The unit should be situated so that its location or position does not interfere with its proper ventilation. For example, the unit should not be situated on a bed, sofa, rug, or similar surface, that may block the ventilation openings; or placed in a built-in installation, such as a bookcase or cabinet that may impede the flow of air through the ventilation openings. 9 Heat – The unit should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators, stoves, or other appliances that produce heat. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. • Explanation of Graphical Symbols The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert you to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. 1 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the unit is operated. 2 Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference. 3 Heed Warnings – All warnings on the unit and in the operating instructions should be adhered to. 4 Follow Instructions – All operating and other instructions should be followed. 5 Water and Moisture – The unit should not be used near water – for example, near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen sink, laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool, etc. 6 Carts and Stands – The unit should be used only with a cart or stand that is recommended by the manufacturer. 6A A unit and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the unit and cart combination to overturn. 7 10 Power Sources – The unit should be connected to a power supply only of the type described in the operating instructions or as marked on the unit. 11 Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the unit. 12 Cleaning – The unit should be cleaned only as recommended by the manufacturer. 13 Nonuse Periods – The power cord of the unit should be unplugged from the outlet when left unused for a long period of time. 14 Object and Liquid Entry – Care should be taken so that objects do not fall into and liquids are not spilled into the inside of the unit. 15 Damage Requiring Service – The unit should be serviced by qualified service personnel when: A. The power-supply cord or the plug has been damaged; or B. Objects have fallen, or liquid has been spilled into the unit; or C. The unit has been exposed to rain; or D. The unit does not appear to operate normally or exhibits a marked change in performance; or E. The unit has been dropped, or the cabinet damaged. 16 Servicing – The user should not attempt to service the unit beyond those means described in the operating instructions. All other servicing should be referred to qualified service personnel. 17 Power Lines – An outdoor antenna should be located away from power lines. 18 Grounding or Polarization – Precautions should be taken so that the grounding or polarization is not defeated. Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer. 2 01RX-V595a-e/f1 2 6/24/99, 11:42 AM Note to CATV system installer: This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical. English 19 For US customers only: Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna is connected to this unit, be sure the antenna system is grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with regard to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING MAST ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE GROUND CLAMP ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT (NEC SECTION 810–20) ELECTRIC SERVICE EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS (NEC SECTION 810–21) GROUND CLAMPS POWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM (NEC ART 250. PART H) NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE FCC INFORMATION (for US customers only) 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE : DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2. IMPORTANT : When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3. NOTE : This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620. The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. We Want You Listening For A Lifetime YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing. Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels. 3 01RX-V595a-e/f1 3 6/24/99, 11:42 AM SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES ACCESSOIRES FOURNIS • After unpacking, check that the following parts are included. • Après le déballage, vérifier que les pièces suivantes sont incluses. • Remote control Before using the remote control, install the supplied batteries. See page 48 for battery installation. • Télécommande Avant d’utiliser la télécommande, mettre les piles fournies en place. Pour la mise en place des piles, voir page 98. • Indoor FM Antenna • Antenne FM intérieure • AM Loop Antenna • Cadre-antenne AM • Antenna adapter (U.S.A. and Canada models only) • Adaptateur d’antenne (Modèles pour les États-Unis et le Canada seulement) • Batteries (size AA, R6, UM-3) • Piles (taille AA, R6, UM-3) 4 01RX-V595a-e/f1 4 6/24/99, 11:42 AM English FEATURES ● CINEMA DSP: Theater-like Sound Experience by the Combination of YAMAHA DSP Technology and Dolby Digital, Dolby Pro Logic or DTS ● Automatic Input Balance Control for Dolby Pro Logic decoding 5-Channel Power Amplification Mininum RMS Output (0.04% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz) U.S.A. and Canada models Main: 70 W + 70 W (8 Ω) Center: 70 W (8 Ω) Rear: 70 W + 70 W (8 Ω) ● Test Tone Generator for Easier Speaker Balance Adjustment ● Speaker Output Mode Selection Australia and China models Main: 65 W + 65 W (8 Ω) Center: 65 W (8 Ω) Rear: 65 W + 65 W (8 Ω) Sophisticated FM/AM Tuner Multi-mode Digital Sound Field Processing ● ● ● ● Digital Sound Field Processor (DSP) Dolby Digital Decoder Dolby Pro Logic Decoder DTS Decoder ● 40-Station Random Access Preset Tuning ● Automatic Preset Tuning ● Preset Station Shifting Capability (Preset Editing) ● 6-Channel External Decoder Input for Other Future Formats ● Video Signal Input/Output Capability (Including S Video Connections) ● SLEEP Timer ● Universal Remote Control with Preset Manufacturer Codes CONTENTS SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES ........................................... 4 FEATURES .................................................................... 5 CAUTION ....................................................................... 6 ● Information about DSP SOUND FIELD PROGRAM ......................................... 36 ● Advanced Information ● Introduction ADJUSTMENTS IN THE “SET MENU” MODE ............ 41 FEATURES OF THE SOUND EFFECTS ....................... 7 CONTROLS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS ....................... 10 ● Remote control ● Preparation REMOTE CONTROL ................................................... 43 SETUP CODES ........................................................... 49 SPEAKER SETUP ....................................................... 13 CONNECTIONS ........................................................... 14 ADJUSTMENTS BEFORE USING THIS UNIT ............ 21 TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................. 50 SPECIFICATIONS ....................................................... 53 ● Basic Operation BASIC OPERATION .................................................... 26 TUNING ....................................................................... 30 SETTING THE SLEEP TIMER ..................................... 35 LIST OF MANUFACTURERS’ CODES ...................... 105 5 01RX-V595a-e/f1 5 6/24/99, 11:42 AM CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. 1. To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. 2. Install this unit in a cool, dry, clean place – away from windows, heat sources, sources of excessive vibration, dust, moisture and cold. Avoid sources of humming (transformers, motors). To prevent fire or electrical shock, do not expose the unit to rain or water. 3. Never open the cabinet. If something drops into the set, contact your dealer. 4. Do not use force on switches, controls or connection wires. When moving the unit, first disconnect the power plug and the wires connected to other equipment. Never pull the wires themselves. 5. The openings on the cover assure proper ventilation of the unit. If these openings are obstructed, the temperature inside the unit will rise rapidly. Therefore, avoid placing objects against these openings, and install the unit in a well-ventilated area to prevent fire and damage. <China model only> Be sure to allow a space of at least 20 cm behind, 20 cm on both sides and 30 cm above the top panel of the unit to prevent fire and damage. 6. The voltage used must be the same as that specified on this unit. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may result in fire or other accidents. YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from the use of this unit with a voltage other than that specified. 7. Digital signals generated by this unit may interfere with other equipment such as tuners, receivers and TVs. Move this unit farther away from such equipment if interference is observed. 8. Always set the VOLUME control to “ ” before starting the audio source play. Increase the volume gradually to an appropriate level after playback has been started. 9. Do not attempt to clean the unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. 10. Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section regarding common operating errors before concluding that the unit is faulty. This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit itself is turned off. This state is called the standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power. FREQUENCY STEP switch (China model only) Because the interstation frequency spacing differs in different areas, set the FREQUENCY STEP switch (located at the rear) according to the frequency spacing in your area. Before setting this switch, disconnect the AC power plug of this unit from the AC outlet. IMPORTANT Please record the serial number of this unit in the space below. MODEL: Serial No.: The serial number is located on the rear of the unit. Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future reference. WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot and fully insert. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. 11. When not planning to use this unit for a long period of time (e.g., a vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 12. To prevent lightning damage, disconnect the AC power plug and disconnect the antenna cable when there is an electrical storm. 13. Grounding or polarization – Precautions should be taken so that the grounding or polarization of the unit is not defeated. 14. AC outlet Do not connect audio equipment to the AC outlet on the rear panel if that equipment requires more power than the outlet is rated to provide. 15. Voltage Selector (China model only) The voltage selector on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are 110/120/220/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz. 6 01RX-V595a-e/f1 6 6/24/99, 11:42 AM English FEATURES OF THE SOUND EFFECTS Introduction Welcome to the exciting world of digital home entertainment. This unit is one of the most complete and advanced AV receivers available. Some of the more advanced features may not be familiar to you, but they are easy to use. State-of-the-art technologies such as Dolby Digital and Digital Theater Systems (DTS) may be new to your home, but you have probably experienced the amazing realism they bring to feature films in theaters around the world. To make the listening experience even more enjoyable, this unit includes a number of exclusive, digitally created listening environments known as digital sound fields. Choosing a sound field program is like transporting yourself to such venues as an outdoor arena, a European church, or a cozy jazz club. Take some time now to read more about these features and enjoy the new experiences this unit brings to your home theater. Digital Sound Field Processing What is it that makes live music so good? Today’s advanced sound reproduction technology lets you get extremely close to the sound of a live performance, but the chances are that you’ll still notice something missing — the acoustic environment of the live concert hall. Extensive research into the exact nature of the sonic reflections that create the ambience of a large hall has made it possible for YAMAHA engineers to bring you this same sound to your listening room, so you’ll feel all the sound of a live concert. Furthermore, our technicians, armed with sophisticated measuring equipment, have even made it possible to capture the acoustics of a variety of actual concert halls, theaters, etc. from around the world, to allow you to accurately re-create any one of these live performance environments, all in your own home. Dolby Pro Logic Dolby Surround has been used in movie theaters since the midseventies. It has also been available in home entertainment systems since the late eighties and continues to be a popular format for home theater systems. It uses four discrete channels and five speakers to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: two main channels (left and right), a center channel for dialog, and a rear channel for special sound effects. The rear channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. Most video tapes and laser discs include Dolby Surround encoding, as do many TV and cable broadcasts. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that stabilizes each channel for even more accurate sound positioning than is available with standard analog processors. 7 01RX-V595a-e/f1 7 6/24/99, 11:42 AM Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is the next level of the Dolby Surround sound system that was developed for 35 mm-film movies by employing low bit-rate audio coding. Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that provides completely independent multi-channel audio to you. Dolby Digital provides five full-range channels in what is sometimes referred to as a “3/2” configuration: three front channels (left, center and right), and two surround channels. A sixth bass-only effect channel is also provided for output of LFE (low frequency effect), or low bass effects that are independent of other channels. (This is called the “LFE channel”.) This channel is counted as 0.1, thus giving rise to the term 5.1 channels in total. Compared to Dolby Surround, which is referred to a “3/1” system (left front, center, right front and just one surround channel), Dolby Digital features two surround channels, called stereo or split surrounds, each offering the same full-range fidelity as the three front channels. By using the built-in Dolby Digital decoder, you can experience the dramatic realism and impact of Dolby Digital theater sound in your home. The wide dynamic range of sound reproduced by the five fullrange channels and precise sound orientation by digital sound processing provides listeners with excitement and realism that have never been experienced before. Dolby Digital forms 5.1 channels as already mentioned, but it can also form fewer channels, for example 2-channel stereo and monaural. You may be able to find some 2-channel stereo and/or monaural sources encoded with Dolby Digital in the market. Laser disc and DVD are home audio/video program sources that could benefit from Dolby Digital. In the near future, Dolby Digital will also be applied to DBS, CATV and HDTV. The ongoing release of Dolby Digital theatrical films now underway will provide an immediate source of Dolby Digital encoded video software. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. DTS Digital Surround DTS (Digital Theater Systems) was developed to replace analog soundtracks of movies with six discrete channels of digital soundtracks, and it is now installed in many theaters around the world. The DTS digital playback system changed the way we experienced movies in theaters with six discrete channels of superb digital audio. DTS technology, through intense research and development has made it possible to deliver similar encode/decode discrete technology to home audio surround-sound entertainment. DTS Digital Surround is an encode/decode system which delivers six channels of master-quality, 20-bit audio; technically, it is 5.1 channels, which means 5 full-range (left, center, right and two surround) channels, plus a subwoofer (LFE) channel (as “0.1”). It is compatible with the 5.1 speaker configurations that are currently available for home theater systems. Laser disc, compact disc and DVD are home audio formats by which DTS can present its high-quality multi-channel audio. (In addition to movies on laser discs, many exciting new multichannel music recordings will also become available in the form of DTS-encoded compact discs.) Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US Pat. No. 5,451,942 and other world-wide patents issued and pending. “DTS”, “DTS Digital Surround”, are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. Copyright 1996 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All Rights Reserved. The DTS Digital Surround algorithm is designed to encode the six channels of 20-bit audio on to some laser discs, compact discs and DVDs with considerably less data compression. By using the DTS decoder built into this unit, you can experience the dramatic realism and impact of the DTSinstalled theater’s high quality sound in your home. 8 01RX-V595a-e/f1 8 6/24/99, 11:42 AM English CINEMA DSP: Dolby Surround + DSP / DTS + DSP The Dolby Surround sound and DTS systems show their full ability in a large movie theater, because movie sounds are originally designed to be reproduced in a large movie theater that uses a multitude of speakers. Trying to create a sound environment similar to that of a movie theater in your home is difficult because of the room size, material inside the walls, the number of speakers, and so on. In other words, your listening room is very different from a movie theater. However, YAMAHA DSP technology allows you to create nearly the same sound experience as that of a large movie theater in your home by compensating for the lack of presence and dynamics in the listening room with original digital sound fields combined with Dolby Surround or DTS Digital Surround sounds. CINEMA DSP The YAMAHA “CINEMA DSP” logo indicates those programs that are created by the combination of YAMAHA DSP technology and Dolby Surround or DTS. Dolby Pro Logic + 2 Digital Sound Fields Dolby Digital or DTS + 3 Digital Sound Fields Digital sound fields are created on the presence side and the rear surround side of the Dolby Pro Logic-decoded sound field, respectively. They create a wide acoustic environment and emphasize the surround effect in the room, letting you feel as much presence as if you were watching a movie in a popular Dolby Stereo theater. Digital sound fields are created on the presence side and the independent left and right surround sides of the Dolby Digitaldecoded or DTS-decoded sound field, respectively. They create a wide acoustic environment and strong surround effect in the room without losing high-channel separation. With the wide dynamic range of Dolby Digital or DTS sound, this sound field combination lets you feel as if you were watching a movie in the newest Dolby Digital theater or DTS-installed theater. This is the most ideal home theater sound at the present time. Refer to pages 36 to 37 for the DSP program. Refer to pages 36 to 37 for the DSP program. 9 01RX-V595a-e/f1 9 6/24/99, 11:42 AM CONTROLS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS FRONT PANEL INPUT VCR • V–AUX • TV/DBS • DVD/LD • CD • TUNER • PHONO VOLUME 18 12 20 STANDBY/ON 22 8 80 2 40 TAPE/MD MON /EXT. DECODER 4 0 –dB A/ B/ C/ D/ E 1 2 3 5 4 6 7 8 MEMORY MAN’L/AUTO FM BASS PHONES TREBLE 1 1 1 2 2 ON OFF 4 4 5 5 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 FM/AM 5 DOWN TUNING UP INPUT MODE AUTO/MAN’L MONO TIME/ LEVEL 0 1 1 2 3 3 TUNING MODE BALANCE 0 0 SPEAKERS A B EDIT 1 SET MENU VIDEO AUX EFFECT 2 3 3 PROGRAM 4 4 L 5 5 R 8 VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R Refer to pages 43 to 48 for the remote control. 1 STANDBY/ON 6 TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) Press this switch to turn on the power of this unit. Press it again to set this unit in the standby mode. Press this button to switch the tuning mode to automatic or manual. To select the automatic tuning mode, press this button so that the “AUTO TUNING” indicator lights up on the display. To select the manual tuning mode, press this button so that the “AUTO TUNING” indicator goes off. Standby mode In this state, this unit consumes a very small quantity of power to receive infrared-signals from the remote control. 2 Remote control sensor 7 FM/AM Press this button to switch the reception band between FM and AM. This receives signals from the remote control. 8 TUNING UP/DOWN 3 Display This button is used for tuning. Press the UP side to tune in to higher frequencies, and press the DOWN side to tune in to lower frequencies. This shows various information. (Refer to page 12 for details.) 4 MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) Press this button to store the broadcasting stations. When this button is pressed and held for more than three seconds, automatic preset tuning begins. 5 EDIT This button is used to exchange the assigment of two preset stations with each other. 9 TAPE/MD MON / EXT. DECODER Press this button to play a tape or an MD. The “TAPE/MD MON” indicator lights up on the display. When you press the button next, the “TAPE/MD MON” indicator goes off, “EXT. DECDR” appears on the display and you can play the signal connected to the EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT terminals. 0 INPUT Turn this selector to select the input source (VCR, VIDEO AUX, TV/DBS, DVD/LD, CD, TUNER, PHONO) that you want to listen to or watch. The name of the selected input source appears on the display. 10 01RX-V595a-e/f1 10 6/24/99, 11:42 AM i BALANCE This button switches between the DVD/LD and TV/DBS input signal modes. This control is used to raise or lower the volume level. This control is only effective for the sound from the main speakers. Turn the control to adjust the balance of the output volume to the left and right speakers to compensate for sound imbalance caused by the speaker location or listening room conditions. e PHONES jack o TIME/LEVEL When you use headphones, connect the headphones to the PHONES jack. You can listen to the sound to be output from the main speakers through the headphones. When using headphones only, set both SPEAKERS A and B to the OFF position and switch off the digital sound field processor (so that no DSP program name appears on the display) by pressing EFFECT. Press this button to select the item in the TIME/LEVEL mode. w VOLUME p +/– These buttons are used to adjust the settings of the SET MENU mode and the TIME/LEVEL mode. In the TIME/LEVEL mode, press + to increase the delay time or speaker output level. Press – to decrease the delay time or speaker output level. r SPEAKERS a SET MENU Set A or B (or both A and B) to the ON position for the main speaker system (connected to this unit) that you want to use. Set the button(s) for the main speaker system you don’t want to use to the OFF position. Press this button to select functions in the SET MENU mode. t A/B/C/D/E Press this button to select one of a group (A to E) of preset stations. y Preset station number selector Each of these buttons selects a preset station number (1 to 8). u Tone controls These controls are only effective for the sound from the main speakers. BASS Use this control to increase or decrease the low-frequency response. The “0” position produces a flat response. TREBLE Use this control to increase or decrease the high-frequency response. The “0” position produces a flat response. s PROGRAM selector Press or to select a DSP program. The name of the selected program appears on the display. d EFFECT Press this button once to switch the effect speakers (center and rear) on or off. If you turn off the effect by using EFFECT, all Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are directed to the main left and right channels. In that case, the left and right channel signal levels may not match. f VIDEO AUX terminals Connect an auxiliary video or audio input source such as a camcorder to these terminals. If the connected video unit has an S video output terminal, connect it to the S VIDEO terminal to obtain a high-resolution picture. The source connected to these terminals can be selected by INPUT. 11 01RX-V595a-e/f1 11 6/24/99, 11:42 AM English q INPUT MODE DISPLAY PANEL 1 Multi-information display This displays various information, for example the station frequency, preset station number and name of the selected input source. 2 MEMORY indicator When MEMORY is pressed, this indicator flashes for about five seconds. During this period, the displayed station can be stored in the memory. 3 AUTO TUNING indicator This lights up when the unit is in the automatic tuning mode. 4 TAPE/MD MON indicator This lights up when the tape deck (or MD recorder, etc.) is selected as the input source by pressing TAPE/MD MON / EXT. DECODER on the front panel or TAPE/MD on the remote control. 5 STEREO indicator This lights up when an FM stereo broadcast with sufficient signal strength is being received. 6 Signal-level indicator 7 indicators Either “dts” indicator lights up when the built-in DTS decoder is turned on. The red “dts” indicator lights up when playing a CD or LD encoded with DTS. The orange “dts” indicator lights up when playing a DVD encoded with DTS. * An orange “dts” indicator may light up when playing a CD or LD encoded with DTS after playing a video-CD or DVD on a DVD/LD combi-player. 8 , and indicators ” lights up when the built-in Dolby Digital decoder is “ on and the signals of the selected source encoded with Dolby Digital are not in 2-channel. “ ” lights up when the built-in digital sound field processor is on, and “ ” lights up when the built-in Dolby Pro Logic decoder is on. Depending on the selected DSP program, both “ ” and “ ”, or ” and “ ” will light up. both “ 9 SLEEP indicator This lights up while the built-in SLEEP timer is functioning. This indicates the signal level of the station being received. If multipath interference is detected, the indication decreases. 12 01RX-V595a-e/f1 12 6/24/99, 11:42 AM English SPEAKER SETUP SPEAKERS TO BE USED This unit is designed to provide the best sound-field quality with a 5-speaker configuration, using main speakers, rear speakers and a center speaker. The main speakers are used for the main source sound plus the effect sounds. They will probably be the speakers from your present stereo system. The rear speakers are used for the effect and surround sounds, and the center speaker is for the center sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system. Use of a subwoofer expands your sound field It is also possible to further expand your system with the addition of a subwoofer. The use of a subwoofer is effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for reproducing the LFE (low frequency effect) sound with high fidelity when playing back a source that is Dolby Digital or DTS-decoded. The YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System is ideal for natural and lively bass reproduction. The main speakers should be high-performance models and have enough power-handling capacity to accept the maximum output of your audio system. The other speakers do not have to be equal to the main speakers. For precise sound localization, however, it is ideal to use high-performance models that can reproduce sounds over the full range for the center speaker and the rear speakers. SPEAKER PLACEMENT Refer to the following diagram when you place the speakers. Main: The position of your present stereo speaker system. Rear: Behind your listening position, facing slightly inward. Nearly 1.8 m (approx. 6 feet) up from the floor. Center: Precisely between the main speakers. (To avoid interference with TV sets, use a magnetically shielded speaker.) Main speaker (R) Subwoofer Center speaker Main speaker (L) Rear speaker (R) Subwoofer: The position of the subwoofer is not as critical, because low bass tones are not highly directional. Rear speaker (L) Note: If the center speaker (principally, it reproduces dialog, vocals, etc.) is not used, the sound will be output from the left and right main speakers. In that case, be sure to select the NONE position for “CNTR” in the SET MENU mode. (See page 21 for details.) 13 01RX-V595a-e/f2 13 6/24/99, 11:42 AM CONNECTIONS Never plug in this unit and other components until all connections have been completed. CONNECTIONS WITH OTHER COMPONENTS Use RCA-type pin plug cables for connecting audio/video components with the exception described later. When making connections between this unit and other components, be sure all connections are made correctly, that is to say L (left) to L, R (right) to R, “+” to “+” and “–” to “–”. Also, refer to the owner’s manual for each component to be connected to this unit. * If you have YAMAHA components numbered as !, #, $, etc. on the rear panel, connections can be made easily by making sure to connect the output (or input) terminals of each component to the same-numbered terminals of this unit. AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED) U.S.A., Canada and China models ....................... 2 OUTLETS Australia model ......................................................... 1 OUTLET Turntable DVD player, LD player, etc. Monitor TV Use these to connect the power cords from your components to this unit. The power to the AC OUTLET(S) is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON or the provided remote control’s POWER and STANDBY. These outlets will supply power to any connected component whenever this unit is turned on. The maximum power (total power consumption of components) that can be connected to the AC OUTLET(S) is 100 watts. (U.S.A. model) To AC outlet CD player Tape deck, MD recorder, etc. TV/DBS tuner VCR (Video cassette recorder) GND terminal (for turntable use) Connecting the ground (earth) wire of the turntable to the GND terminal will normally minimize hum, but in some cases, better . results may be obtained with the ground wire disconnected. 14 01RX-V595a-e/f2 14 6/24/99, 11:42 AM English CONNECTING TO DIGITAL (COAXIAL AND/OR OPTICAL) TERMINALS If your DVD (LD) player, TV/DBS tuner, etc. are equipped with coaxial or optical digital audio signal output terminals, they can be connected to this unit’s COAXIAL and/or OPTICAL digital signal input terminals. Digital audio signals are transmitted with less loss than analog audio signals. In addition, digital audio signal connections are necessary, especially for an LD player or a DVD player, to send signals encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS to this unit. To make a connection between optical digital audio signal terminals, remove the cover from each terminal, and then connect them by using a commercially available optical fiber cable that conforms to EIAJ standards. Other cables might not function correctly. Even if you connect an audio/video unit to the COAXIAL (or OPTICAL) terminal of this unit, you must keep the unit connected with the same-named analog audio signal terminals of this unit, because a digital signal cannot be recorded by a tape deck, MD recorder or VCR connected to this unit. You can easily switch the selection of input signals between “digital” and “analog.” (See page 28 for details.) Notes • When connecting an audio/video unit to both the digital and analog terminals of this unit, make sure to connect between both terminals of the same name. • Be sure to attach the covers when the OPTICAL terminals are not being used in order to protect them from dust. • The input signal from the DVD/LD input terminals is selected in the following order of priority with the input mode set to the AUTO position: 1 COAXIAL terminal 2 OPTICAL terminal 3 Analog terminal • If the DIGITAL OUT data of the player has been processed in any way, you may not be able to perform DTS playback even if you make a digital connection between this unit and the player. • All digital audio signal input terminals are applicable to sampling frequencies of 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz and 48 kHz. No sound will be generated when connecting your LD player’s Dolby Digital RF signal output terminal directly to this unit’s COAXIAL DVD/LD digital signal input terminal. DVD or LD player* * If your LD player has a Dolby Digital RF signal output terminal, be sure to use the RF demodulator (separately purchased). TV/DBS tuner (U.S.A. model) 15 01RX-V595a-e/f2 15 6/24/99, 11:42 AM CONNECTING TO S VIDEO TERMINALS If you have a VCR and a monitor equipped with “S” (highresolution) video terminals, those terminals can be connected to this unit’s S VIDEO terminals. Connect the VCR’s “S” video input and output terminals to this unit’s S VIDEO VCR OUT and IN terminals, respectively, and connect the monitor’s “S” video input terminal to this unit’s S VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminal. Otherwise, connect the VCR’s composite video terminals to this unit’s composite video terminals, and connect the monitor’s composite video input terminal to this unit’s composite MONITOR OUT terminal. In addition, if you have a DVD or LD player equipped with an “S” video terminal, connect the DVD/LD player’s “S” video output terminal to this unit’s S VIDEO DVD/LD terminal. VCR S Note If video signals are sent to both S VIDEO input and composite input terminals, the signals will be sent to their respective output terminals. DVD/LD player S S VIDEO terminals This unit provides you with S VIDEO terminals in addition to standard VIDEO terminals. S VIDEO terminals transmit video signals separated into luminance (Y) signals and color (C) signals. In comparison with S VIDEO terminals, standard VIDEO terminals transmit “composite” video signals. S VIDEO cable CONNECTING TO VIDEO AUX TERMINALS (ON THE FRONT PANEL) These terminals are used to connect any video input source such as a camcorder to this unit. S S Camcorder 16 01RX-V595a-e/f2 16 S S S 6/24/99, 11:42 AM Monitor TV English CONNECTING TO AN EXTERNAL DECODER This unit is equipped with additional 6-channel audio signal input terminals for inputting signals from an external decoder to this unit. Connect the 6-channel audio signal output terminals of the decoder to the EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT terminals of this unit. Notes • When signals input to these terminals are selected, the digital sound field processor cannot be used. • The settings of “CNTR”, “REAR”, “MAIN” and “BASS” in the SET MENU mode have no effect on the signals input to these terminals. The setting of “M.LVL” is effective. (Refer to page 21 for details.) • Adjustment of the output level of the center speakers, rear speakers and subwoofer is effective when the signals input to these terminals are selected as the input source. (Refer to page 39 for details.) External decoder with 6-channel discrete outputs (U.S.A. model) IMPEDANCE SELECTOR SWITCH WARNING Do not change the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch setting while the power to this unit is on, otherwise this unit may be damaged. If this unit fails to turn on when the STANDBY/ON switch is pressed, the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch may not be fully set to either end. If so, set the switch to either end fully when this unit is in the standby mode. IMPEDANCE SELECTOR Select the position whose requirements your speaker system meets. (Upper position) Main: If you use one pair of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 4 Ω or higher. If you use two pairs of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. Center: The impedance of the speaker must be 6 Ω or higher. Rear: The impedance of each speaker must be 6 Ω or higher. (U.S.A. model) (Lower position) Main: If you use one pair of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. If you use two pairs of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 16 Ω or higher. <Canada model only> The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. Center: The impedance of the speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. Rear: The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. 17 01RX-V595a-e/f2 17 6/24/99, 11:43 AM CONNECTING SPEAKERS Main speakers A Right Main speakers B Left Right Left (U.S.A. model) Rear speakers Left Center speaker Subwoofer system Note Use speakers with the specified impedance shown on the rear panel of this unit. Main speaker connections One or two speaker systems can be connected to this unit. If you use only one speaker system, connect it to either of the SPEAKERS A or B terminals. Subwoofer connection You may wish to add a subwoofer to reinforce low frequencies or to output low bass sound from the subwoofer channel. If you have a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, including the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, connect the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT terminal of this unit to the input terminal of the subwoofer system. Rear speaker connections A rear speaker system can be connected to this unit. Place them to the rear of your listening position. Center speaker connection A center speaker can be connected to this unit. Place it on or under the TV. 18 01RX-V595a-e/f2 Right 18 6/24/99, 11:43 AM English How to connect Connect the SPEAKERS terminals to your speakers with wire of the proper gauge, cut as short as possible. If the connections are faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers. Make sure that the polarity of the speaker wires is correct, that is the + and – markings are observed. If these wires are reversed, the sound will be unnatural and lack bass. Caution Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other and do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could damage the unit and/or speakers. Connecting to the MAIN SPEAKERS terminals Connecting to the REAR and CENTER SPEAKERS terminals Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) 1 Unscrew the knob. 2 Remove approx. 5 mm (1/4”) of insulation from each of the speaker wires and insert one bare wire into each terminal. 3 Tighten the knob to secure the wire. 2 1 3 1 3 2 1 Press the tab. 2 Remove approx. 5 mm (1/4”) of insulation from each of the speaker wires and insert one bare wire into each terminal. 3 Release the tab to secure the wire. Banana plug connections are also possible. Simply insert the banana plug connector into the corresponding terminal. 19 01RX-V595a-e/f2 19 6/24/99, 11:43 AM ANTENNA CONNECTIONS Each antenna should be correctly connected to the designated terminals, referring to the following diagram. Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this unit. In general, these antennas will probably provide sufficient signal strength. Nevertheless, a properly installed outdoor antenna will give clearer reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, an outdoor antenna may result in improvement. Outdoor FM antenna * You may be unable to obtain good FM radio reception depending on your local conditions (distance from the broadcast station, interposing buildings and mountains, etc.). Consult your dealer or authorized service center and be sure to install an antenna that suits your local conditions. Install the special FM outdoor antenna in a high place as far away from any roads as possible to avoid being affected by automobile ignition noise. Indoor FM antenna (included) Outdoor AM antenna * Firmly insert the connector into the FM ANT terminal. * If you cannot obtain good reception with the AM loop antenna, connect 5 m to 10 m of vinyl covered wire to the AM ANT terminal and extend it outdoors from a window. (Be sure to also connect the AM loop antenna at this time.) (U.S.A. model) AM loop antenna (included) 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter 75-ohm coaxial cable 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter Ground 300-ohm feeder GND terminal For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the GND terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth. Connecting the AM loop antenna 1 1 Press the tab and unlock the terminal hole. 2 Connect the AM loop antenna lead wires to the AM ANT and GND terminals. 3 Return the tab to its original position to lock the lead wires. Lightly pull the lead wires to confirm a good connection. 2 Attach the loop antenna to the antenna stand. 3 Orient the AM loop antenna so that the best reception is obtained. Loop antenna 1 3 2 Antenna stand • The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit. The antenna may be hung on a wall. • The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit. 20 01RX-V595a-e/f2 20 6/24/99, 11:43 AM English ADJUSTMENTS BEFORE USING THIS UNIT SELECTING THE OUTPUT MODES This unit provides you with the following five functions to determine the method of distributing output signals to speakers suitable for your audio system. When speaker connections have all been completed, select the proper setting for each function to make the best use of your speaker system. (See “ADJUSTMENTS IN THE ‘SET MENU’ MODE” on page 41.) 1. CNTR (CENTER SPEAKER) 2. REAR (REAR SPEAKERS) 4. BASS (LFE/BASS OUT) 5. M.LVL (MAIN LEVEL) DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION CNTR (CENTER SPEAKER) Choices: LARGE/SMALL/NONE Preset position: LARGE LARGE: Select this position when your center speaker is approximately the same size as the main speakers. SMALL: Select this position when you use a center speaker that is smaller than the main speakers. In this position, low bass signals (below 90 Hz) on the center channel are output from the main speakers (or the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT terminal if the SMALL position is selected for “MAIN” and the SW position is selected for “BASS”). NONE: Select this position when you do not have a center speaker (four speaker system). The center channel sound will be output from the left and right main speakers. REAR (REAR SPEAKERS) Choices: LARGE/SMALL Preset position: LARGE LARGE: Select this position if your rear speakers have high ability for bass reproduction, or if a subwoofer is connected in parallel to the rear speaker. In this position, full-range signals are output from the rear speakers. SMALL: Select this position if your rear speakers do not have high ability for bass reproduction. In this position, low bass signals (below 90 Hz) on the rear channels are output from the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT terminal (or the main speakers if the MAIN position is selected for “BASS”). MAIN (MAIN SPEAKERS) Choices: LARGE/SMALL Preset position: LARGE LARGE: Select this position if your main speakers have high ability for bass reproduction. In this position, full-range signals present on the main channels are output from the main speakers. SMALL: Select this position if your main speakers do not have high ability for bass reproduction. However, if your system does not include a subwoofer, do not select this position. In this position, low bass signals (below 90 Hz) on the main channels are output from the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT terminal if the SW or BOTH position is selected for “BASS”. 3. MAIN (MAIN SPEAKERS) BASS (LFE/BASS OUT) Choices: SW/MAIN/BOTH Preset position: SW MAIN: Select this position if your system does not include a subwoofer. In this position, full-range signals present on the main channels, signals from the LFE channel and other low bass signals that are distributed from other channels are output from the main speakers. SW/BOTH: Select either the SW or BOTH position if your system includes a subwoofer. In either position, signals on the LFE channel and other low bass signals that are distributed from other channels are output from the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT terminal. When the LARGE position is selected for “MAIN”, in the SW position, no signal is distributed from the main channels to the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT terminal; however, in the BOTH position, low bass signals from the main channels are output to both the main speakers and the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT terminal. M.LVL (MAIN LEVEL) Choices: NRML (NORMAL)/–10 dB Preset position: NRML (NORMAL) NRML (NORMAL): Normally select this position. –10 dB: Select this position if the sound output from the main speakers is too loud and cannot be balanced with the sound output from the center and rear speakers. In this position, the sound output from the main speakers is attenuated. Note The settings of “CNTR”, “REAR”, “MAIN” and “BASS” have no effect on the signals input to the EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT terminals on the rear of this unit. 21 01RX-V595a-e/f2 21 6/24/99, 11:43 AM ADJUSTMENT METHOD Adjustments should be made while watching the information on this unit’s display. 1 2 1 3 2 3 When adjusting with the remote control, set the SELECTOR DIAL to the AMP/TUN or DSP position on the remote control. 3 Front panel or 1 Press + or – once or more to select the setting you want. Remote control Turn the power on. Front panel or Remote control or 2 Press SET MENU once or more to select the function “CNTR” on the display. Front panel Remote control 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to change the settings for “REAR”, “MAIN”, “BASS” and/or “M.LVL” in the same way. or * After pressing SET MENU once on the remote control, you can also select the function by pressing . (Pressing goes back one selection.) 22 01RX-V595a-e/f2 22 6/24/99, 11:43 AM English SPEAKER BALANCE ADJUSTMENT This procedure lets you adjust the sound output level balance between the main, center and rear speakers by using the built-in test tone generator. When this adjustment is performed, the sound output level heard at the listening position will be the same from each speaker. This is important for the best performance of the digital sound field processor, the Dolby Digital decoder, the Dolby Pro Logic decoder and the DTS decoder. The adjustment of each speaker output level should be done at your listening position with the remote control. After completing the adjustment of the output level for each speaker, use VOLUME ( ) on the remote control at your listening position to check if the adjustments are satisfactory. 2 1 5,9 2 6 3 8 4 4,7 Set the SELECTOR DIAL to the AMP/TUN or DSP position on the remote control. 2 Turn the power on. Front panel Remote control or or 1 Set VOLUME to the “ ” position. Front panel 3 Select the main speakers to be used. Front panel * If you use two main speaker systems, press both A and B. 23 01RX-V595a-e/f2 23 6/24/99, 11:43 AM 4 Set BASS, TREBLE and BALANCE to the “0” position. 6 Front panel 5 Press TEST so that “TEST LEFT” appears on the display. Remote control Turn up the volume. Remote control You will hear a test tone (like pink noise) from each speaker for about two seconds in following order: left main speaker, center speaker, right main speaker, right rear speaker and left rear speaker. The display changes as shown below. Main (L) Center Main (R) Rear (R) Rear (L) * If the function “CNTR” in the SET MENU mode is set to the NONE position, you will hear the center channel test tone from the left and right main speakers. 7 Adjust BALANCE so that the sound output level of the left main speaker and the right main speaker is the same. Front panel 24 01RX-V595a-e/f2 24 6/24/99, 11:43 AM Adjust the sound output levels of the center speaker and the rear speakers so that they become almost the same as that of the main speakers. Press TIME/LEVEL once or more to select the speaker to be adjusted so that “CENTER”, “R SUR.” or “L SUR.” appears on the display. Remote control * You cannot adjust the delay time while the test tone is sounding even if “DELAY” appears on the display after pressing TIME/LEVEL once or more. Adjust the level. * Pressing raises and lowers the level. * While adjusting, the test tone is heard from the selected speaker. Remote control 9 When the adjustment is finished, press TEST again to stop the test tone. Remote control 25 01RX-V595a-e/f2 25 6/24/99, 11:43 AM English 8 Notes • Once you have completed these adjustments, you can only adjust the overall sound level of your audio system by using VOLUME (or VOLUME ( ) on the remote control). • If you use external power amplifiers, you may also use their volume controls to achieve the proper balance. • If the function “CNTR” in the SET MENU mode is set to the NONE position, the sound output level of the center speaker cannot be adjusted in step 8. The center sound is automatically output from the left and right main speakers. • If there is insufficient sound output from the center and rear speakers, you may decrease the main speaker output level by setting “M.LVL” to “–10 dB”. BASIC OPERATION TO PLAY A SOURCE 2 3 1,7 2 3,4 5 8 8 48 7 When using the remote control • Set the SELECTOR DIAL to the AMP/TUN position on the remote control. • To operate the CD player, DVD/LD player, tape deck, MD recorder, or other components with this remote control, set the SELECTOR DIAL to the component to be used. (See “SETUP CODES” on page 49.) 1 3 Select the desired input source by using INPUT. (Turn on the monitor TV for video sources.) Front panel Remote control or Set VOLUME to the “ ” position. Front panel The name of the selected input source will appear on the display. 2 Turn the power on. Front panel Remote control or To play a tape or an MD Press TAPE/MD MON / EXT. DECODER on the front panel or TAPE/MD on the remote control so that the “TAPE/MD MON” indicator lights up on the display. To use a decoder connected to the EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT terminals Press TAPE/MD MON / EXT. DECODER once or more on the front panel or EXT. DEC. on the remote control so that “EXT. DECDR” appears on the display. 26 01RX-V595a-e/f3 26 Front panel 6/24/99, 11:43 AM For a DVD/LD or TV/DBS source, the current input mode is also shown. * To change the input mode for the DVD/LD or TV/DBS source, press INPUT MODE (or the button that you have pressed to select the input source in step 3 on the remote control) once or more until the desired input mode is shown on the display. (See page 28 for details on switching the input mode.) Front panel 7 Adjust the volume to the desired output level. Front panel Remote control or Remote control 8 or If desired, adjust BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE, etc. and use the digital sound field processor (see pages 36 to 37). BASS: Turn this control clockwise to increase (or counterclockwise to decrease) the lowfrequency response. TREBLE: Turn this control clockwise to increase (or counterclockwise to decrease) the highfrequency response. Input mode 5 English 4 Select the main speakers to be used. Front panel BALANCE: Adjust the balance of the output volume from the left and right speakers to compensate for any sound imbalance caused by the speaker location or listening room conditions. Front panel * If you use two main speaker systems, press both A and B. 6 Play the source. (See page 30 for detailed information on tuning.) * These controls are only effective for the sound from the main speakers. Front panel Remote control or When you have finished using this unit Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel again or STANDBY on the remote control to set this unit in the standby mode. 27 01RX-V595a-e/f3 27 6/24/99, 11:44 AM Notes on using INPUT • The audio source selected by INPUT will not be played if the “TAPE/MD MON” indicator lights up or if “EXT. DECDR” is displayed. • If you select a video source by INPUT without canceling the selection of TAPE/MD MON / EXT. DECODER on the front panel (or TAPE/MD or EXT. DEC. on the remote control), the play back result will be a video image from the video source and the sound from the audio source selected by TAPE/MD MON / EXT. DECODER on the front panel (or TAPE/MD or EXT. DEC. on the remote control). • If an audio source is selected by INPUT while watching a video source, the selected audio source will be played, but the video image will not be interrupted. • When you select an input source by INPUT, the DSP program (or no DSP program) that was being used when the same input source was selected the last time will be automatically recalled. • If “DATA ERR” appears on the display while playing a CD or LD encoded with DTS, stop playback and turn the player off and then on again. Switching the input mode (for DVD/LD and TV/DBS) This unit allows you to switch the input mode for sources that send two or more types of signal to this unit. The following three input modes are provided. AUTO This mode is automatically selected when you turn on the power of this unit. In this mode, the input signal is automatically selected in the following order of priority: 1. 2. Notes on input mode selection • The input mode for a TV/DBS source is selected with the function “INPUT” in the SET MENU mode. (See page 42 for details.) • Set the input mode to AUTO to play a DVD/LD source encoded with Dolby Digital. • Set the input mode to ANALOG to play a normal 2-channel source with a Dolby Surround program. • The sound output may be interrupted in some LD and DVD players in the following situation: The input mode is set to AUTO. A search is made while playing the disc encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS, and then disc playing is restored. The sound output is interrupted for a moment because the digital input signal was selected again. • The input mode cannot be changed for the PHONO, TUNER, TAPE/MD, CD, VCR and VIDEO AUX sources because only analog signals are used. • The present input mode appears on the display when the input source is changed to DVD/LD or TV/DBS, or the input mode is changed. Notes on playing a source encoded with DTS If you play a CD or LD encoded with DTS while the AUTO mode is selected, there will be a short noise at first while the unit identifies the DTS signal and activates the DTS decoder. This is not a malfunction, and can be avoided by setting the input mode to DTS beforehand. In addition, If you continue to play a CD or LD encoded with DTS with the input mode setting left at AUTO, this unit automatically switches to the “DTS-decoding” mode to prevent noise from being generated during future operation. (The red “dts” indicator lights up on the display.) No sound will be heard if a normal PCM CD or LD is played in this mode. (The red “dts” indicator will flash.) To play a normal disk, return the input mode from DTS to AUTO. Digital signal encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS, or normal digital input signal (PCM) Analog input signal (ANALOG) * For a DVD/LD source, if digital signals are input from both the OPTICAL and COAXIAL terminals, the digital signal from the COAXIAL terminal is selected. DTS In this mode, only a digital input signal encoded with DTS is selected, even though other signals are input at the same time. ANALOG In this mode, only an analog input signal is selected, even though digital signals are input at the same time. Select this mode when you want to use an analog input signal instead of digital input signals. 28 01RX-V595a-e/f3 28 6/24/99, 11:44 AM English TO RECORD A SOURCE ON TAPE, MD OR VIDEO CASSETTE 4 1 2 4 1 2 1 4 Select the source to be recorded. Front panel Remote control When a tape deck or MD recorder is being used for recording, you can monitor the sounds being recorded by pressing TAPE/MD MON / EXT. DECODER on the front panel or TAPE/MD on the remote control so that the “TAPE/MD MON” indicator lights up on the display. Front panel Remote control or or 2 Play the source and then turn up the volume to confirm the input source. (See page 30 for detailed information on tuning.) Front panel Remote control or 3 Begin recording on the tape deck, MD recorder or VCR connected to this unit. Notes • The settings of DSP and VOLUME, BASS, TREBLE and BALANCE have no effect on the material being recorded. • Composite video and S video signals pass independently through this unit’s video circuits. Therefore, when recording or dubbing video signals, if your video source unit is connected to provide only an S video (or only a composite video) signal, you can record only an S video (or only a composite video) signal on your VCR. • A source that is connected to this unit only through the digital terminals cannot be recorded on a tape deck, MD recorder or VCR connected to this unit. • A source of signals input to the EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT terminals of this unit cannot be recorded. • Please check the copyright laws in your country to record from records, compact discs, radio, etc. Recording of copyright material may infringe copyright laws. If you watch video software that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, there may be a case that the picture itself will be affected by those signals. 29 01RX-V595a-e/f3 29 6/24/99, 11:44 AM TUNING Quick automatic-search tuning (AUTOMATIC TUNING) is effective when station signals are strong and there is no interference. However, if the signal from the station you want to select is weak, you must tune in to it manually (MANUAL TUNING). 2 3 1 AUTOMATIC TUNING MANUAL TUNING Set the SELECTOR DIAL to the AMP/TUN position on the remote control and select TUNER as the input source. 1 Select the reception band (FM or AM) and confirm it on the display. 1 Front panel Select the reception band (FM or AM) and confirm it on the display. Front panel or 2 Press TUNING MODE so that the “AUTO TUNING” indicator lights up on the display. or 2 Press TUNING MODE. Front panel Front panel Check that the “AUTO TUNING” indicator goes off. Lights up 3 To tune in to a higher frequency, press the UP side of TUNING once. To tune in to a lower frequency, press the DOWN side of TUNING once. 3 Tune in manually to the desired station. Front panel Front panel * To continue the tuning search, press and hold the button. * If the station where the tuning search stops is not the desired one, press once more. * If the tuning search does not stop at the desired station (because the signal from the station is weak), take the manual tuning procedure. Notes • If you tune in manually to an FM station, it will be automatically received in monaural mode to increase the signal quality. • When tuned in to a station, the frequency of the received station is shown on the display. 30 01RX-V595a-e/f3 30 6/24/99, 11:44 AM English MANUAL PRESET TUNING This unit can store station frequencies to be selected by tuning. With this function, you can recall any desired station simply by selecting the preset station number with which it was stored. Up to 40 stations (8 stations x 5 groups) can be stored. 2 4 3 To store stations 1 2 Tune in to the desired station. (See page 30 for the tuning procedure.) 4 Select the preset station number with which you want to store the station before the “MEMORY” indicator goes off from the display. Front panel Press A/B/C/D/E once or more to select the desired group (A to E) of preset stations and confirm it on the display. Front panel 3 The displayed station has been stored as A1. Press MEMORY so that the “MEMORY” indicator flashes for about five seconds. Front panel * In the same way, store other stations as A2, A3 ... A8. * You can store more stations as preset station numbers in other groups in the same way by selecting another group in step 2. Flashes 31 01RX-V595a-e/f3 31 6/24/99, 11:44 AM 1 2 1 2 To recall a preset station 1 Select the group of preset stations. Front panel Remote control or 2 Select the preset station number. Front panel Remote control Notes • A new setting can be stored in place of the former one. • For presets, the setting of the reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with the station frequency. Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost when this unit is set in the standby mode. If, however, the power plug is disconnected from the AC outlet or the power is cut due to temporary power failure for more than one week, the memory will be erased. If so, it can be re-stored by simply following the preset tuning procedure. or 32 01RX-V595a-e/f3 32 6/24/99, 11:44 AM English AUTOMATIC PRESET TUNING (for FM stations only) You can also make use of the automatic preset tuning function for FM stations only. This function enables the unit to perform automatic tuning and to sequentially store FM stations with strong signals. Up to 40 stations can be stored automatically in the same way as that for manual preset tuning on page 31. Note that a new setting can be stored in place of the former one. 3 1 2 4 To store stations 1 4 Select the FM band. Front panel To tune in to higher frequencies, press the UP side of TUNING once. To tune in to lower frequencies, press the DOWN side of TUNING once. Front panel 2 Press TUNING MODE so that the “AUTO TUNING” indicator lights up on the display. * If TUNING is not pressed, automatic preset tuning soon begins automatically toward the higher frequencies. Front panel Lights up 3 Automatic preset tuning begins from the frequency currently displayed. Received stations are sequentially stored as A1, A2 ... A8. * If more than 8 stations are received, they are stored as preset station numbers in other groups (B, C, D and E) in that order. Press MEMORY and hold for about three seconds. Front panel Flashes If you want to store the first station received by automatic preset tuning as a desired preset station number For example, if you want to store the first received station as C5, select “C5” while “A1”, the “MEMORY” indicator and the “AUTO TUNING” indicator flash after pressing MEMORY in step 3. Then press TUNING. The first received station is stored as C5, and the next stations as sequentially C6, C7 ... . If stations have all been stored up to E8, automatic preset tuning stops automatically. When automatic preset tuning is completed The display shows the frequency of the last preset station. Check the contents and the number of preset stations by following the procedure in the section “To recall a preset station” on page 32. 33 01RX-V595a-e/f3 33 6/24/99, 11:44 AM Notes • You can manually replace a preset station with another FM or AM station by simply following the procedure in the section “To store stations” on page 31. • Even if the number of received stations is not enough to be stored up to E8, the search is automatically ended after searching all frequencies. • With this function, only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are automatically stored. If the station you want to store is weak in signal strength, tune in to it manually in monaural sound and store it by following the procedure in the section “To store stations” on page 31. EXCHANGING PRESET STATIONS You can exchange the assignment of two preset stations with each other as shown below. 2,4 Example If you want to change the preset station from “E1” to “A5”, or vice versa. 1 2 Recall preset station “E1” by following the procedure in the section “To recall a preset station” on page 32. 3 Next, recall preset station “A5” by following the same procedure as that in step 1. Press EDIT. Front Panel Flashes Flashes 4 Press EDIT once more. Front Panel Shows the exchange of stations has been completed. 34 01RX-V595a-e/f3 34 6/24/99, 11:44 AM English SETTING THE SLEEP TIMER The SLEEP timer can be used to make this unit automatically switch to the standby mode. When you are going to sleep while enjoying a broadcast or other desired input source, this timer function is useful. The SLEEP timer can only be controlled with the remote control. Notes • To set the SLEEP timer for this unit, set the SELECTOR DIAL to a position other than the TV position. To set the SLEEP timer for your TV, set the SELECTOR DIAL to the TV position. • The components for which the SLEEP timer is effective are the sources connected to the AC OUTLET(S) on the rear panel of this unit. 1 To set the SLEEP time 1 To cancel the selected SLEEP time Play the source which you want to enjoy when you are going to sleep and press SLEEP once or more to select the desired SLEEP time. Remote control Remote control Press SLEEP once or more so that “SLEEP OFF” appears on the display. (It will soon disappear and the “SLEEP” indicator will go off from the display.) The SLEEP time is displayed. Note The SLEEP timer setting can also be canceled by setting the unit in the standby mode with STANDBY/ON on the front panel (or STANDBY on the remote control) or by disconnecting the power plug of the unit from the AC outlet. Flashes Each time you press SLEEP, the SLEEP time will change as follows: (Minutes) 120 90 60 30 The SLEEP timer is off (SLEEP OFF). (This is the state before SLEEP is pressed.) The “SLEEP” indicator soon lights up and the display returns to the indication before the SLEEP timer was set. 2 The unit will be switched to the standby mode automatically at the selected SLEEP time. 35 01RX-V595a-e/f3 35 6/24/99, 11:44 AM SOUND FIELD PROGRAM This unit incorporates a sophisticated, multi-program digital sound field processor. This processor allows you to electronically expand and change the shape of the audio sound field from both audio and video sources, creating a theater-like experience in your listening room. You can create outstanding audio sound by selecting a suitable sound field program (this will, of course, depend on what you are listening to) and adding any desired adjustments. The operation of built-in decoders (Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS) can be controlled by selecting a corresponding DSP program incorporating the combined operation of YAMAHA DSP and Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS. The following list gives you a brief description of the sound fields produced by each of the DSP programs. Keep in mind that most of these are precise digital re-creations of actual acoustic environments. For movie or audio/video sources No. FEATURES PROGRAM 1 Normal Program [1] DOLBY PRO LOGIC ( ) • Input source : Dolby Surround 2-ch Dolby Digital • Output channel : 4 channels • DSP :— [2] DOLBY DIGITAL ( ) • Input source : Dolby Digital • Output channel : 5.1 channels • DSP :— [3] DTS ( ) • Input source : DTS • Output channel : 5.1 channels • DSP :— 2 Enhanced Program [1] DOLBY PRO LOGIC/Enhanced ( • Input source : Dolby Surround 2-ch Dolby Digital • Output channel : 4 channels • DSP : 1 (surround) [2] DOLBY DIGITAL/Enhanced ( • Input source : Dolby Digital • Output channel : 5.1 channels • DSP : 2 (surround L, R) [3] DTS/Enhanced ( ) • Input source : DTS • Output channel : 5.1 channels • DSP : 2 (surround L, R) The built-in Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital or DTS decoder precisely reproduces the sound and effect of the encoded source. The realization of a highly efficient decoding process improves cross talk and channel separation and makes sound positioning smoother and more precise. ) ) This program ideally simulates the multi-surround speaker systems of the 35 mm-film movie theater. Each decoding and digital sound field processing operation is precisely performed without altering the original sound orientation. The surround effect produced by the sound field folds around the viewer naturally from the rear to the left and right and toward the screen. 36 01RX-V595a-e/f4 36 6/24/99, 11:45 AM 3 FEATURES PROGRAM CINEMA DSP Program [1] 70 mm MOVIE THEATER ( ) • Input source : Dolby Surround 2-ch Dolby Digital • Output channel : 3 channels • DSP : 2 (presence & surround) [2] 70 mm MOVIE THEATER – DOLBY D. ( • Input source : Dolby Digital • Output channel : 5.1 channels • DSP : 3 (presence & surround L, R) [3] 70 mm MOVIE THEATER – DTS ( ) • Input source : DTS • Output channel : 5.1 channels • DSP : 3 (presence & surround L, R) English No. Creates the extremely wide sound field of a movie theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound in detail, giving both the video and the sound field incredible reality. Any kind of video source encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS (especially large-scale movie productions) is ideal for use with this program. ) 4 MONO MOVIE • Input source : Monaural • Output channel : 1 • DSP :1 This program is designed specifically to enhance monaural sources. Compared to a strictly mono setting, the sound image is wider and slightly forward of the speaker pair, lending an immediacy to the overall sound. 5 TV SPORTS • Input source : Audio/Video • Output channel : 2 to 5.1 channels • DSP : 2 to 3 (presence & surround) This program is furnished with a tight sound field in which the sound will not spread excessively at the front, but the rear surround produces dynamic sound expansion. For Hi-Fi Audio sources No. 6 PROGRAM Hi-Fi DSP Program • Input source : 2-ch PCM/Analog audio • Output channel : 2 channels • DSP :1 [1] DISCO FEATURES Simulates the acoustics of disco in the heart of a lively city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. [2] ROCK CONCERT Ideally suited for rock music. You will experience a dynamic and lively sound field. [3] CONCERT HALL Creates the expansive ambience of a large concert hall. Orchestra and opera music are suited to this program. 37 01RX-V595a-e/f4 37 6/24/99, 11:45 AM PLAYING A SOURCE WITH THE DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSOR (DSP) EFFECT Follow steps 1 to 7 shown in “TO PLAY A SOURCE” on pages 26 to 27. Select the desired DSP program that is suitable for the source. Front panel Remote control TO CANCEL THE SOUND EFFECT To cancel the sound effect and monitor only the main sound, press EFFECT or EFCT ON/OFF. Press EFFECT or EFCT ON/OFF once more to turn sound effect back on. Front panel Remote control or or Press DSP. While the indicator is lit up for about three seconds, select a DSP program with the numeric buttons (1 to 8). * If the SELECTOR DIAL is set to the DSP position, you can also select a DSP program directly with the numeric buttons (1 to 8). The name of the selected program appears on the display. If desired, adjust the delay time and the output level of each speaker. (See pages 39 and 40 for details.) The following indicators on the display show you what sound processing is being undertaken. 1 2 3 4 5 1 This lights up in orange when a DVD source encoded with DTS is played back and DTS is decoded. 2 This lights up in red when an LD source or a CD source encoded with DTS is played back and DTS is decoded. 3 This lights up when Dolby Digital is being decoded and the signals of the selected source encoded with Dolby Digital is not in 2-channel. 4 This lights up when the digital sound field processor is turned on. 5 This lights up when Dolby Surround is being decoded by Dolby Pro Logic. Notes • You can select a program for each of the input sources. Once you select a program, it is linked with the input source selected at that time. So, when you select the input source next time, the same program is automatically called up. • When a monaural sound source is being played with DOLBY PRO LOGIC or DOLBY PRO LOGIC ENHANCED, no sound will be heard from the main speakers and the rear speakers. Sound can only be heard from the center speaker. However, if the NONE position is selected for “CNTR” in the SET MENU mode, the main speakers will output the sound of the center channel. • When the source of signals input to the EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT terminals of this unit is selected, DSP cannot be used. • If the sound effect is canceled when signals encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS are input to this unit, the signals of all channels are mixed and are output from the main speakers. • If EFFECT or EFCT ON/OFF is pressed to turn the sound effects off when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoded, it may happen that the sound is output faintly or not output normally, depending on the source. In that case, press EFFECT or EFCT ON/OFF to turn on the sound effects. If you change the LD (or CD) being played back with DTS being decoded to another disc that is not encoded with DTS when the red “dts” indicator lights up, playing back the newly selected disc will result in no sound output. In this state, the red “dts” indicator flashes to show that this unit is locked in the DTS-decoding mode. To play back the disc normally, change the current DTSdecoding mode to another mode by INPUT MODE on the front panel or by INPUT on the remote control so that the red “dts” indicator goes off. 38 01RX-V595a-e/f4 38 6/24/99, 11:45 AM English ADJUSTING THE DELAY TIME AND SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS When using the digital sound field processor with the Dolby Pro Logic decoder, the Dolby Digital decoder or the DTS decoder, you can adjust the delay time between the main sound and sound effect, and each speaker’s output level as you prefer. 1 2 1 2 Adjustment method When adjusting with the remote control, set the SELECTOR DIAL to the AMP/TUN or DSP position on the remote control. 2 Press + or – to adjust the settings for the delay time or speaker output levels. Front panel Remote control or 1 or Press TIME/LEVEL once or more until the name of the item which you want to adjust appears on the display. Front panel Remote control 3 or Repeat steps 1 and 2 to adjust the settings of any other item. * After pressing TIME/LEVEL once on the remote control, you can also select the name of item by pressing . When pressed, the selection changes as follows: DELAY CENTER Delay time Center speaker output level R SUR. Right rear speaker output level L SUR. Left rear speaker output level SWFR Subwoofer output level * Pressing on the remote control changes the selection in the reverse order. * Depending on the setting in the SET MENU mode, you may not be able to select all these items. 39 01RX-V595a-e/f4 39 6/24/99, 11:45 AM Adjusting the delay time You can adjust the time difference between the beginning of the sound from the main speakers and the beginning of the sound effect from the rear speakers. The larger the value, the later the sound effect is generated. This adjustment can be individually made to all programs. Notes • Adding too much delay will cause an unnatural effect with some sources. • When + or – is pressed, the sound is momentarily interrupted. Program Control range (ms) Preset value 1. 15 to 30 0 to 15 0 to 15 15 to 30 0 to 15 0 to 15 15 to 30 1 to 99 1 to 99 1 to 99 1 to 99 1 to 99 1 to 99 1 to 99 20 5 5 20 5 5 20 16 16 49 9 40 16 44 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. DOLBY PRO LOGIC DOLBY DIGITAL DTS DOLBY PRO LOGIC/Enhanced DOLBY DIGITAL/Enhanced DTS/Enhanced 70 mm MOVIE THEATER 70 mm MOVIE THEATER – DOLBY D. 70 mm MOVIE THEATER – DTS MONO MOVIE TV SPORTS DISCO ROCK CONCERT CONCERT HALL Adjusting the output level of the center, right rear and left rear speakers, and subwoofer If desired, you can adjust the sound output level of each speaker even if the output level has already been set in “SPEAKER BALANCE ADJUSTMENT” on pages 23 to 25. Notes • The output level of the center speaker cannot be adjusted when the DISCO, ROCK CONCERT or CONCERT HALL program is selected, and the input signal is analog, PCM audio, or encoded with Dolby Digital in 2-channel. • If the function “CNTR” in the SET MENU mode is set to the NONE position, the sound output level of the center speaker cannot be adjusted. This is because, in this mode, the center speaker sound is automatically output from the left and right main speakers. • Once the output level has been adjusted, the level will be the same for all digital sound field programs. Speaker Control range (dB) Preset value CENTER RIGHT REAR LEFT REAR SUBWOOFER MIN, –20 to +10 MIN, –20 to +10 MIN, –20 to +10 MIN, –20 to 0 0 0 0 0 Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost when this unit is set in the standby mode. If, however, the power plug is disconnected from the AC outlet or the power is cut due to temporary power failure for more than one week, the latest values for the delay time and the center/rear/subwoofer output levels that were set will automatically return to the preset values. If so, they can be re-set by simply following the adjustment method on page 39. 40 01RX-V595a-e/f4 40 6/24/99, 11:45 AM English ADJUSTMENTS IN THE “SET MENU” MODE The following ten types of functions will maximize the performance of your system and expand your enjoyment for audio listening and video watching. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. CNTR (CENTER SPEAKER) REAR (REAR SPEAKERS) MAIN (MAIN SPEAKERS) BASS (LFE/BASS OUT) M.LVL (MAIN LEVEL) D.D.LFE (DOLBY DIGITAL LFE LEVEL) For details on “CNTR”, “REAR”, “MAIN”, “BASS” and “M.LVL”, see page 21. (Once you have selected the appropriate settings, you do not have to change any settings unless an alteration is made in your speaker system.) D.D.LFE (Adjusting the level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital) Control range: –20 dB to 0 dB (in 1 dB steps) Preset value: 0 dB * This adjustment is effective only when Dolby Digital is being decoded and the signals of the selected source encoded with Dolby Digital contain LFE signals. This adjusts the output level of the LFE channel. If the LFE signals are mixed with signals of other channels and they are output from the same speakers, the ratio of the LFE signal level to the level of the other signals can be adjusted. (See page 8 for details about the LFE channel.) D.RNG (Adjusting the dynamic range) Choices: MAX/STD/MIN Preset position: MAX * This adjustment is effective only when Dolby Digital is being decoded. “Dynamic range” is the difference between the maximum level and the minimum level of sounds. Sounds on a movie originally designed for movie theaters feature a very wide dynamic range. Dolby Digital technology can modify the original sound track into a home audio format with this wide dynamic range unchanged. Powerful sounds of extremely wide dynamic range are not always suitable for home use. Depending upon the condition of your listening environment, it may not be possible to increase the sound output to a level as high as that in a movie theater. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. D.RNG (DYNAMIC RANGE) DTS LFE (DTS LFE LEVEL) C.DELAY (CENTER DELAY) GUARD (MEMORY GUARD) INPUT (INPUT MODE) However, at the normal level suitable for listening in your room, the low-level parts of source sound often cannot be heard well because they will be lost among noise in your environment. Dolby Digital technology has also made it possible to reduce an original sound track’s dynamic range for a home audio format by “compressing” the sound data. MAX: In this position, a source encoded with Dolby Digital is reproduced in the original sound track’s wide dynamic range to provide you with powerful sounds just like those in a movie theater. Selecting this position will be even better if you can listen to a source at a high output level in a room specially soundproofed for audio/video enjoyment. STD (Standard): In this position, a source encoded with Dolby Digital is reproduced in the “compressed” dynamic range of the source that is suitable for low-level listening. MIN: In this position, the dynamic range is more reduced than in the STD position. Selecting this position will be effective when you must listen to a sound source at a low level. * In this position, it may happen that sound is output faintly or not output normally depending on the source. In that case, select the MAX or STD position. DTS LFE (Adjusting the level of the LFE channel for DTS) Control range: –10 dB to +10 dB (in 1 dB steps) Preset value: 0 dB * This adjustment is effective only when DTS is being decoded and the signals of the selected source encoded with DTS contain LFE signals. This adjusts the output level of the LFE channel. If the LFE signals are mixed with signals of other channels and they are output from the same speakers, the ratio of the LFE signal level to the level of the other signals can be adjusted. (See page 8 for details about the LFE channel.) 41 01RX-V595a-e/f5 41 6/24/99, 11:45 AM C.DELAY [Adjusting the delay of center sounds (dialog, etc.)] Control range: 0 ms to 5 ms (in 1 ms steps) Preset value: 0 ms * This adjustment is effective only when Dolby Digital or DTS is being decoded and the signals of the selected source encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS contain center-channel signals. This adjusts the delay between the main sound (on the main channels) and dialog, etc. (on the center channel). The larger the value, the later the dialog, etc. is generated. Adjustment method Adjustments should be made while watching the information on this unit’s display. When adjusting with the remote control, set the SELECTOR DIAL to the AMP/TUN or DSP position on the remote control. or Press SET MENU once or more so that the function which you want to change appears on the display. Front panel This is for making sounds from the left main, center and right main speakers reach your listening position at the same time. This is achieved by delaying the sound from the center speaker if the distance from the center speaker to your listening position is shorter than the distance from the left or right main speaker to your listening position. GUARD (Memory guard) Choices: ON/OFF Preset position: OFF Remote control or * After pressing SET MENU once on the remote control, you can also select the title by pressing . (Pressing goes back one selection.) Press + or – to select any desired position or to edit parameters of the chosen function. If you wish to prevent accidental alterations to SET MENU and other adjustments on this unit, select ON. The following functions on this unit can be locked by this operation: • Other functions in the SET MENU mode • Functions in the TIME/LEVEL mode • Functions when using TEST Front panel Remote control or INPUT (Selecting the mode of the TV/DBS input) Repeat these steps to change or adjust the settings of any other function. Choices: AUTO/LAST Preset position: AUTO You can designate the input mode that is automatically selected when the power of this unit is switched on for only the sources connected to the TV/DBS input terminals of this unit. AUTO: LAST: In this position, the AUTO input mode is always selected when the power for this unit is switched on. In this position, the input mode you selected last time is memorized and will not be changed when the power is switched on again. Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost when this unit is set in the standby mode. If, however, the power plug is disconnected from the AC outlet or the power is cut due to temporary power failure for more than one week, the settings of the SET MENU mode will automatically return to the factory settings. If so, they can be re-set by simply following the procedure above. * See page 28 for details on switching the input mode. 42 01RX-V595a-e/f5 42 6/24/99, 11:45 AM You can use the remote control to control not only this unit but also other components connected to it. The remote control is factory set to control this unit and most YAMAHA audio components. To control other brands of components, you must preset the remote control with the manufacturers’ codes listed from page 105. Components which can be controlled There are nine positions that you can select to control connected components with this remote control. When turning the SELECTOR DIAL, the position changes as follows: AMP/TUN: You can perform the basic operations of this unit with the SELECTOR DIAL set to this position. TV: A television can be controlled. CBL/DBS: A cable television or DBS tuner can be controlled. VCR: A VCR can be controlled. TAPE/MD: The code for a YAMAHA tape deck is preset. (Be sure to preset the proper code when operating a YAMAHA MD recorder.) CD: The code for a YAMAHA CD player is preset. SELECTOR DIAL DSP: This unit can be controlled and DSP programs can be selected directly. DVD/LD & DVD MENU: An LD player can be controlled by using the DVD/LD position. A DVD player can be controlled by using the DVD/LD and DVD MENU positions. The code for a YAMAHA DVD player is preset. If the remote control will not operate your YAMAHA DVD player, you need to preset code number “4490.” Notes 1. The shaded positions in the diagram above indicate that you can preset the code for the manufacturer of your component. Note that you can preset only one code for one position. (See “SETUP CODES” on page 49 for details). 2. DVD/LD and DVD MENU positions: • Be sure that the SELECTOR DIAL is set to the DVD/LD position before presetting the code for a DVD or an LD player. The code that you preset to the DVD/LD position is also simultaneously preset to the DVD MENU position. You cannot preset the code for a DVD player when the SELECTOR DIAL is set to the DVD MENU position. • DVD MENU operations cannot be performed for some DVD players. 3. When using a second (and third) VCR (See “To use a second (and third) VCR” on page 49 for details.): • If you are not using a CBL/DBS (cable TV or DBS tuner), the second (or third) VCR can be preset by using the CBL/DBS position. • If you are not using a DVD player, the second (or third) VCR can be preset by using the DVD MENU position. Note that in this case you must preset the code for an LD player to the DVD/LD position even if an LD player is not being used. 4. The button functions on the remote control differ depending on the position selected by the SELECTOR DIAL. Refer to the following pages for details. Basic operation 1 Select the position for the component that you want to control by turning the SELECTOR DIAL. Note: Turn the SELECTOR DIAL until it stops with a click. 2 Press the desired operation button. Note: Press the button with the remote control aimed at the front panel. The position name is displayed in this window. Indicator The indicator will flash when the button is pressed. 43 01RX-V595a-e/f6 43 6/24/99, 11:45 AM English REMOTE CONTROL The lightly marked buttons do not function. ■ AMP/TUN Note: TV POWER and TV VOLUME function if you have preset the code for your TV. 1 POWER w 1 Indicator window: Displays the names of components which can be controlled. Indicator: Flashes in red when the button is pressed. SELECTOR DIAL: Selects the position for the component to be controlled. 2 3 4 5 6 e r This button turns the unit on. 2 INPUT Press one of these buttons to select the required input source. 3 EXT. DEC. Press this button when using an external decoder. 4 A/B/C/D/E Press this button to select a group of preset stations. 5 DSP Press this button. While the indicator is lit up for about three seconds, select a DSP program by using the number buttons (1 to 8). No DSP program can be selected after the indicator goes off. 6 PRESET (+/–) Press these buttons to select the preset station number. 7 VOLUME ( ) Press these buttons to adjust the volume level. 7 8 TV VOLUME 8 MUTE Press this button to mute the sound. To cancel mute, press this button once more, or press the operation buttons of this unit. 9 9 SLEEP TV POWER Press this button to set the SLEEP timer. 0 t 0 (LEFT), (RIGHT) These buttons are used to adjust the settings of the SET MENU mode and the TIME/LEVEL mode. q TIME/LEVEL y q Press this button to set the unit in the TIME/LEVEL mode and to select the item. w STANDBY Press this button to set this unit in the standby mode. e TEST Press this button to output a test tone for adjusting the output level of the speakers. r EFCT (EFFECT) ON/OFF Press this button to turn on or off the DSP program which includes the Dolby Pro Logic decoder, the Dolby Digital decoder and the DTS decoder. ■ DSP t (NEXT), (BACK) These buttons are used to advance or go back one selection in the SET MENU mode and TIME/LEVEL mode. y SET MENU Press this button to set the unit in the SET MENU mode and to select functions. 2 DSP program Press one of these buttons to select the required DSP program (1 to 8). When you select the input source, set the SELECTOR DIAL to the AMP/TUN position. 2 Note: The function of all buttons other than DSP program is the same as that with the AMP/TUN position. 44 01RX-V595a-e/f6 44 6/24/99, 11:45 AM ■ TAPE/MD 1 Notes: • TV POWER and TV VOLUME function if you have preset the code for your TV. • Be sure to preset the proper code for your MD recorder. TAPE MD 1 POWER 1 POWER This button turns the unit on under factory settings. If another code for your tape deck whose remote control has a power button is preset, the button will turn on the tape deck. This button turns the unit on if you have preset the code for the YAMAHA MD recorder. If another code for your MD recorder whose remote control has a power button is preset, the button will turn on the MD recorder. 2 (REC/PAUSE) Press this button to give a pause in recording on the tape deck. 3 DIR A Press this button to select the playing direction of deck A. 4 (PLAY) TV VOLUME Press this button to play a tape. 5 (REWIND) Press this button to rewind a tape. 6 TV POWER 7 8 9 0 q 2 3 4 5 7 DECK A/B Press this button to select deck A or B on the double cassette tape deck. 9 DIR B Press this button to select the playing direction of deck B. 0 (STOP) Press this button to stop the operation of a tape. q (FAST FORWARD) Press this button to fast forward a tape. ■ CD 2 (REC/PAUSE) 3 (SKIP) 4 (PLAY) 5 (SEARCH) 6 DISP (DISPLAY) 8 (PAUSE) 9 (SKIP) 0 (STOP) q (SEARCH) Note: TV POWER, TV VOLUME and TV INPUT function if you have preset the code for your TV. 1 1 POWER This button turns the unit on under factory settings. If another code for your CD player whose remote control has a power button is preset, the button will turn on the CD player. 2 DISC SKIP (+/–) (for a CD player with a CD changer) Press these buttons to skip to the next or previous CD. 3 , (SKIP) to skip to the beginning of the next track. Press Press of the previous track. to skip to the beginning 4 (PLAY) Press this button to play a CD. 2 TV VOLUME TV POWER DISPLAY TV INPUT 6 3 4 5 7 8 5 (SEARCH) This button initiates a backward search on the track that is playing to find the point from which you want to listen. 6 (PAUSE) Press this button to give a pause in operation. This button functions as PAUSE/ STOP* for operating YAMAHA CD players under factory settings. 7 (STOP) Press this button to stop operation. This button functions as PAUSE/STOP* for operating YAMAHA CD players under factory settings. 8 (SEARCH) This button initiates a fast-forward search on the track that is playing to find the point from which you want to listen. * PAUSE/STOP function ... Press the button once to give a pause in operation and once more to stop operation. 45 01RX-V595a-e/f6 45 6/24/99, 11:46 AM English The lightly marked buttons do not function. See “AMP/TUN” on page 44 for those buttons which are not described here. Please refer to the owner’s manual for details of each component. The lightly marked buttons do not function. See “AMP/TUN” on page 44 for those buttons which are not described here. Please refer to the owner’s manual for details of each component. ■ DVD/LD POWER (DVD) This button turns the unit on under factory settings. If another code for your DVD player whose remote control has a power button is preset, the button will turn on the DVD player. (LD) This button turns the unit on if you have preset the code for the YAMAHA LD player. If another code for your LD player whose remote control has a power button is preset, the button will turn on the LD player. Note: TV POWER, TV VOLUME and TV INPUT function if you have preset the code for your TV. DISC SKIP TV VOLUME TV POWER SKIP/SEARCH PLAY SUBTITLE (DVD)/SEARCH (LD) SUBTITLE ON/OFF (DVD) DISPLAY TV INPUT PAUSE STOP ANGLE (DVD)/SEARCH (LD) AUDIO (DVD) ■ DVD MENU Note: TV POWER, TV VOLUME and TV INPUT function if you have preset the code for your TV. POWER This button turns the unit on under factory settings. If another code for your DVD player whose remote control has a power button is preset, the button will turn on the DVD player. Numeric buttons CLEAR +10 DISC SKIP TV VOLUME TV POWER MENU LEFT MENU SELECT SET UP TITLE TITLE/INDEX TV INPUT MENU UP MENU RIGHT MENU DOWN RETURN MENU 46 01RX-V595a-e/f6 46 6/24/99, 11:46 AM ■ VCR ■ TV Note: TV POWER, TV VOLUME and TV INPUT function if you have preset the code for your TV. Note: You can only control your VCR if you have preset the code for it. POWER POWER CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL ENTER CHANNEL ENTER CHANNEL UP DOWN CHANNEL UP DOWN TV EFFECT ON/OFF TV VOLUME TV POWER DISPLAY VCR REC Press this button twice to start recording. TV INPUT PAUSE PLAY STOP REWIND FAST FORWARD TV MUTE TV SLEEP TV POWER VCR REC Press this button twice. TV VOLUME DISPLAY TV INPUT VCR PAUSE VCR PLAY VCR REWIND VCR STOP VCR FAST FORWARD ■ CBL/DBS Note: TV POWER, TV VOLUME and TV INPUT function if you have preset the code for your TV. POWER CHANNEL CHANNEL ENTER +100 CHANNEL UP DOWN TV VOLUME TV POWER MENU LEFT MENU SELECT DISPLAY TV INPUT MENU UP MENU RIGHT MENU DOWN RECALL MENU 47 01RX-V595a-e/f6 47 6/24/99, 11:46 AM English The lightly marked buttons do not function. See “AMP/TUN” on page 44 for those buttons which are not described here. Please refer to the owner’s manual for details of each component. NOTES ABOUT THE REMOTE CONTROL Battery installation 1. 2. 3. Remote control operation range Turn the remote control over and slide the battery compartment cover in the direction of the arrow. Insert the batteries (AA, R6 or UM-3 type) according the polarity markings on the inside of the battery compartment. Close the battery compartment cover. Remote control sensor Within approximately 6 m (20 feet) 2 1 3 Battery replacement If the remote control operates only when it is close to the unit, the batteries are weak. Replace all the batteries with new ones. Notes • There should be no large obstacles between the remote control and the unit. • If the remote control sensor is directly illuminated by strong lighting (especially from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp), it might cause the remote control not to work correctly. In this case, reposition the unit to avoid direct lighting. Be sure to replace the batteries within about two minutes. If it takes longer than two minutes, the codes preset for the remote control will return to the factory settings. Notes • Use only AA, R6 or UM-3 batteries for replacement. • Be sure the battery polarity is correct. (See the illustration inside the battery compartment.) • Remove the batteries if the remote control will not be used for an extended period of time. • If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. 48 01RX-V595a-e/f6 48 6/24/99, 11:46 AM English SETUP CODES Presetting the remote control Perform the presetting procedure for each component you want to control with the remote control. Note: If your component does not respond to any of the codes listed for the manufacturer, use the original remote control that was supplied with the component. To control your components (MD recorder, DVD player, TV, etc.) 1. 2. Turn on the component to be used. Set the SELECTOR DIAL to the desired position for the component (TAPE/MD, DVD/LD, TV, etc.). 3. Press both VOLUME buttons ( ) for about four seconds at the same time so that the indicator flashes twice. 4. 5. Use the numeric buttons to enter the four-digit manufacturer’s code for the component to be used. Make sure that the indicator flashes twice. If the indicator does not flash, repeat step 3 and re-enter the code. Press POWER (or any other button) on the remote control to check if you have preset the code correctly. If the component cannot be controlled with the remote control, try entering another code for the same manufacturer. To use a second (and third) VCR You can use the CBL/DBS and/or DVD MENU positions to control a second (and/or third) VCR if a CBL (or DBS) or DVD player is not being used. If you are using the DVD MENU position for a second (or third) VCR, you must preset the code for an LD player to the DVD/LD position. 1. 2. Turn on the VCR to be used. Set the SELECTOR DIAL to the CBL/DBS or DVD MENU position. 3. Press both VOLUME buttons ( ) for about four seconds at the same time so that the indicator flashes twice. To return all components to the factoryset codes, follow these steps. 1. Set the SELECTOR DIAL to a position other than the AMP/TUN or DSP position. 2. Press both VOLUME buttons ( ) for about four seconds at the same time so that the indicator flashes twice. 3. Enter code number “9987”. 4. Make sure that the indicator flashes twice. To return each component to the factoryset code, follow these steps. 1. Set the SELECTOR DIAL to the position for the component to be returned to the factory-set code. 2. Press both VOLUME buttons ( ) for about four seconds at the same time so that the indicator flashes twice. 3. Enter code number “9999”. 4. Make sure that the indicator flashes twice. 4. Press MUTE. 5. Use the numeric buttons to enter the four-digit code for the second (or third) VCR. Make sure that the indicator flashes twice. If the indicator does not flash, repeat steps 3 and 4, and re-enter the code. 6. Returning to the factory-set codes Press POWER (or any other button) on the remote control to check if you have preset the code correctly. If the VCR cannot be controlled with the remote control, try entering another code for the same manufacturer. The following codes are preset as the factory settings. Factory-set codes POSITION Component Code*1 Code*2 TV 0037 0047 CBL/DBS DBS tuner TV 2455 2566 VCR VCR 3072 3060 DVD/LD DVD player 4545 YAMAHA CD CD player 6187 YAMAHA TAPE/MD Tape deck 8524 YAMAHA *1: Australia model *2: U.S.A., Canada and China models We recommend that you write all the code numbers you have preset on the “Quick Reference Card.” 49 01RX-V595a-e/f6 49 6/24/99, 11:46 AM TROUBLESHOOTING If the unit fails to operate normally, check the following points to determine whether the fault can be corrected by the simple measures suggested. If it cannot be corrected, or if the fault is not listed in the SYMPTOM column, disconnect the power cord and contact your authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center for help. Amplifier SYMPTOM REMEDY CAUSE The unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ON is pressed, or set in the standby mode suddenly soon after the power has been turned on. The power cord is not plugged in or the plug is not completely inserted. Firmly plug in the power cord. The IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch on the rear panel is not fully set to the upper or lower end. Set the switch fully to the upper or lower end when the unit is in the standby mode. The unit does not work normally. The internal microcomputer has been frozen by an external electric shock (lightning, excessive static electricity, etc.) or by a power supply with low voltage. Set the unit in the standby mode and disconnect the AC power cord from the AC outlet. After about 30 seconds have passed, connect the power and operate the unit again. No sound or no picture. Incorrect output cord connections. Connect the cords properly. If the problem persists, the cords may be defective. An appropriate input source has not been selected. Select an appropriate input source with INPUT or TAPE/MD MON / EXT. DECODER. SPEAKERS have not been set properly. Set SPEAKERS corresponding to the speakers in use to the ON position. The speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. Digital signals other than PCM audio and Dolby Digital or DTS encoded signals which this unit cannot reproduce are input to this unit by playing a CD-ROM etc. Play a source whose signals this unit can reproduce. No picture. There is no S video terminal connection between this unit and the TV, although S video signals are input to this unit. Connect this unit’s S VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminal to the TV’s S video input terminal. The sound suddenly goes off. The protection circuit has been activated because of a short circuit, etc. Set the unit in the standby mode and then switch on again to reset the protection circuit. The SLEEP timer has functioned. Turn on the power, and play the source again. Only the speakers on one side can be heard. Incorrect setting of BALANCE. Adjust it to the appropriate position. Incorrect cord connections. Connect the cords properly. If the problem persists, the cords may be defective. A “humming” sound can be heard. Incorrect cord connections. Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem persists, the cords may be defective. No connection from the turntable to the GND terminal. Make the GND connection between the turntable and this unit. The volume level is low while playing a record. The record is being played on a turntable with an MC cartridge. The turntable should be connected to the unit through the MC head amplifier. The volume level cannot be increased, or the sound is distorted. The component connected to the REC OUT terminals of this unit is in the standby mode. Turn on the power to the component. 50 01RX-V595a-e/f7 50 6/24/99, 11:47 AM No sound from the effect speakers. FM Amplifier No sound from the rear speakers. No sound from the center speaker. CAUSE REMEDY The sound effect setting is off. Press EFFECT on the front panel or EFCT ON/OFF on the remote control to turn it on. A Dolby Surround or DTS decoding program is being used with material not encoded with Dolby Surround or DTS. Use a different sound field program. The sound output level of the rear speakers is set to minimum. Raise the sound output level of the rear speakers. A monaural sound source is being played in the DOLBY PRO LOGIC or DOLBY PRO LOGIC ENHANCED program. Select another sound field program suitable for the monaural sound source. The sound output level of the center speaker is set to minimum. Raise the sound output level of the center speaker. The function “CNTR” in the SET MENU is set to the NONE position. Select the LARGE or SMALL position. Incorrect sound field program selection. Select the appropriate program. The input signals of the source encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS do not have center channel signals. Refer to the instructions for the source being currently played. The sound field cannot be recorded. It is not possible to record the sound field on a tape deck or MD recorder connected to the unit’s REC OUT terminals. The DVD/LD, TV or DBS source cannot be recorded on a tape deck, MD recorder or VCR connected to this unit. The DVD/LD player, TV or DBS tuner is connected to the unit by only the digital terminals. Make additional connections between the analog terminals. FM stereo reception is noisy. The characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts may cause this problem when the transmitter is too far away or the antenna input is poor. Check the antenna connections. Try using a high-quality directional FM antenna. Set TUNING MODE to the manual tuning mode. There is distortion and clear reception cannot be obtained even with a good FM antenna. There is multipath interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate multipath interference. The desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. The station is too weak. Use the manual tuning method. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna. Previously preset stations can no longer be tuned in. The unit has been unplugged for a long period. Repeat the presetting procedure. The desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. The signal is weak or the antenna connections are loose. Tighten the AM loop antenna connections and rotate it for best reception. AM Use the manual tuning method. There are continuous crackling and hissing noises. Noise will result from lightning, fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats and other electrical equipment. Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire. This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to eliminate all noise. There are buzzing and whining noises (especially in the evening). A television set is being used nearby. Relocate this unit away from the TV. 51 01RX-V595a-e/f7 51 6/24/99, 11:47 AM English SYMPTOM SYMPTOM The remote control does not work. Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of this unit. Change the position of this unit. The manufacturer’s code has not been set properly. Set the code again. The proper manufacturer’s code for the component to be controlled has not been set. Try entering another code for the same manufacturer. The component to be controlled has not been selected. Set the SELECTOR DIAL to the proper position. The sound is degraded when listening with the headphones to a CD player or tape deck that is connected to this unit. This unit is in the standby mode. Turn on the power of the unit. There is noise interference from digital or high-frequency equipment or the unit. The unit is too close to the digital or high-frequency equipment. Move the unit further away from such equipment. Remote control Others REMEDY CAUSE When playing back a source encoded with DTS SYMPTOM CAUSE REMEDY The player which plays back the source is not connected to a digital audio signal input terminal of this unit. The player must be connected to a digital audio signal input terminal of this unit besides the analog audio signal terminal connections. The ANALOG input mode is selected on this unit. Select a proper input mode on this unit to turn on the DTS decoder built into the unit. A percussive noise is heard when you begin playing back a source encoded with DTS. If the AUTO input mode is selected, depending on some sources, there may be a case that a noise is heard while this unit is identifying the format of the input signal. Set the input mode of the currently selected input source to DTS. No sound is heard when you play back a source encoded with DTS, even though the AUTO input mode is selected on this unit. The DTS decoder built into this unit does not function because the player has a digital volume control and it is set at a position other than “maximum,” “neutral” or “ineffective.” Set the player’s digital volume control at the maximum, neutral or ineffective position. No sound is heard when you play back an MD or DAT on to which you have recorded a source encoded with DTS. A source encoded with DTS cannot be recorded on to an MD or DAT. No sound is heard when you play back a source (CD, etc.) even though the currently selected input mode is AUTO. In the AUTO mode, the DTS-decoding mode cannot be automatically changed to the normal (PCM) digital signal input mode. A loud hissing noise is heard when you play back a source encoded with DTS. Press INPUT MODE on the front panel or INPUT (for the currently selected source) on the remote control so that AUTO appears on the display. Notes • It is necessary to use a DTS decoder to play back a source encoded with DTS, so the player which plays back the source must be connected to a digital audio input terminal of this unit in the way described in this manual. If this connection is not made or only a D-to-A converter is being used without using a DTS decoder, when you play back the source, only a loud hissing noise will be heard. • If you make a search (or skip, etc.) operation while playing back a source encoded with DTS, the “dts” indicator goes out from the display. This is because this unit automatically changes the DTS-decoding mode to the standard (PCM) digital signal input mode to prevent a noise from being output. 52 01RX-V595a-e/f7 52 6/24/99, 11:47 AM English SPECIFICATIONS AUDIO SECTION Minimum RMS Output Power 8 ohms, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD [U.S.A. and Canada models] MAIN L/R ........................... 70 W + 70 W CENTER ......................................... 70 W REAR L/R .......................... 70 W + 70 W [Australia, Singapore, China and General models] MAIN L/R ........................... 65 W + 65 W CENTER ......................................... 65 W REAR L/R .......................... 65 W + 65 W 8 ohms, 1 kHz, 0.07% THD [U.S.A. and Canada models] MAIN L/R ........................... 85 W + 85 W CENTER ......................................... 85 W REAR L/R .......................... 85 W + 85 W [Australia, Singapore, China and General models] MAIN L/R ........................... 80 W + 80 W CENTER ......................................... 80 W REAR L/R .......................... 80 W + 80 W Maximum Power [China and General models only] 8 ohms, 1 kHz, 10% THD MAIN L/R ......................... 105 W + 105 W CENTER ......................................... 105 W REAR L/R ........................ 105 W + 105 W Dynamic Power per Channel (by IHF Dynamic Headroom measuring method) MAIN L/R 8/6/4/2 ohms [U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................... 100/120/145/170 W [Australia, Singapore, China and General models] ........................ 90/110/135/160 W Dynamic Headroom (8 ohms) [U.S.A. and Canada models only] ... 1.55 dB Power Band Width MAIN L/R 8 ohms, 35 W, 0.1% THD ......................................... 10 Hz to 50 kHz Damping Factor (SPEAKER A) 8 ohms, 20 Hz to 20 kHz ............ 60 or more Input Sensitivity/Impedance PHONO MM ................... 2.5 mV/47 k-ohms CD/TAPE·MD/DVD·LD/TV·DBS/VCR/ VIDEO AUX ................... 150 mV/47 k-ohms EXT. DECODER MAIN L/R .................... 150 mV/47 k-ohms CENTER/SURROUND L/R/SUBWOOFER .................................... 150 mV/40 k-ohms Maximum Input Signal PHONO MM 1 kHz, 0.1% THD ............. 100 mV or more CD/TAPE·MD/DVD·LD/TV·DBS/VCR/ VIDEO AUX (EFFECT ON) 1 kHz, 0.5% THD .................. 2.2V or more Output Level/Impedance REC OUT ..................... 150 mV/1.2 k-ohms SUBWOOFER (MAIN SP: SMALL) ........ 4.0 V/1.2 k-ohms Headphones Jack Rated Output/Impedance CD/TAPE·MD/DVD·LD/TV·DBS/VCR/ VIDEO AUX input, 1 kHz, 150 mV, 8 ohms ...... 0.5 V/390 ohms Frequency Response (20 Hz to 20 kHz) CD/TAPE·MD/DVD·LD/TV·DBS/VCR/ VIDEO AUX to MAIN L/R SP OUT .................................................... 0±0.5 dB Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) MAIN L/R SP OUT ................ 150 µV or less Channel Separation (Vol. –30 dB, EFFECT OFF) PHONO MM (Input Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz) .................... 60 dB or more/55 dB or more CD/TAPE·MD/DVD·LD/TV·DBS/VCR/ VIDEO AUX (Input 5.1 k-ohms Terminated, 1 kHz/10 kHz) .................... 60 dB or more/45 dB or more Tone Control Characteristics BASS: Boost/cut ............. ±10 dB (50 Hz) Turnover Frequency ......... 350 Hz TREBLE: Boost/cut ........... ±10 dB (20 kHz) Turnover Frequency ........ 3.5 kHz Filter Characteristics MAIN L/R, REAR L/R (SPEAKER: SMALL) (H.P.F.) .................... fc = 90 Hz, 12 dB/oct. SUBWOOFER (L.P.F.) ..................... fc = 90 Hz, 18 dB/oct. VIDEO SECTION Video Signal Type [U.S.A. and Canada models] .............. NTSC [Australia and Singapore models] ......... PAL [China and General models] ....... NTSC/PAL RIAA Equalization Deviation PHONO MM .................................. 0±0.5 dB Video Signal Level ................ 1 Vp-p/75 ohms Total Harmonic Distortion (20 Hz to 20 kHz) PHONO MM to REC OUT 1 V ........................................ 0.02% or less S-Video Signal Level Y ......................................... 1 Vp-p/75 ohms C .................................. 0.286 Vp-p/75 ohms CD/TAPE·MD/DVD·LD/TV·DBS/VCR/ VIDEO AUX (EFFECT OFF) to MAIN SP OUT 35 W/8 ohms ...................... 0.025% or less Maximum Input Level .......... 1.5 Vp-p or more Signal-to-Noise Ratio ............... 50 dB or more Signal-to-Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) PHONO MM to REC OUT (5 mV, Input Shorted) [U.S.A., Canada, China and General models] ............................... 86 dB or more [Australia and Singapore models] ............................................ 81 dB or more CD/TAPE·MD/DVD·LD/TV·DBS/VCR/ VIDEO AUX (EFFECT OFF) to MAIN SP OUT (150 mV, Input Shorted) ...... 96 dB or more Monitor Out Frequency Response .............................. 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB 53 01RX-V595a-e/f7 53 6/24/99, 11:47 AM FM SECTION GENERAL Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] ..................................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz [Australia and Singapore models] ................................. 87.50 to 108.00 MHz [China and General models] 100 kHz step ................ 87.5 to 108.0 MHz 50 kHz step .............. 87.50 to 108.00 MHz 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF) (100% mod., 1 kHz) [U.S.A., Canada, China and General models only] Mono .............................. 1.6 µV (15.3 dBf) Stereo ............................. 23 µV (38.5 dBf) AM SECTION Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] ....................................... 530 to 1,710 kHz [Australia and Singapore models] ....................................... 531 to 1,611 kHz [China and General models] 10 kHz step .................... 530 to 1,710 kHz 9 kHz step ...................... 531 to 1,611 kHz Usable Sensitivity ............................ 300 µV/m Signal-to-Noise Ratio ............................ 52 dB Antenna .................................... Loop antenna Usable Sensitivity (DIN) [Australia and Singapore models only] Mono (S/N 26 dB) ........................... 0.9 µV Stereo (S/N 46 dB) ........................... 28 µV Alternate Channel Selectivity (±400 kHz ) [U.S.A., Canada, China and General models only] .................................................... 75 dB Selectivity (two signals, 40 kHz Dev. ±300 kHz) [Australia and Singapore models only] ......................................................... 55 dB Signal-to-Noise Ratio [U.S.A., Canada, China and General models] (IHF) Mono/Stereo ................. 81 dB/75 dB [Australia and Singapore models] (DIN-Weighted, 40 kHz Dev.) Mono/Stereo ............................................... 75 dB/69 dB Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz) Mono/Stereo .................................. 0.1/0.2% Stereo Separation (1 kHz) .................... 48 dB Output Level (30% mod., 1 kHz) ........................... 150 mV Power Supply [U.S.A. and Canada models] ........................................ AC 120 V, 60 Hz [Australia model] ................ AC 240 V, 50 Hz [General model] .............. AC 110/120/220/240 V, 50/60 Hz [China model] .................... AC 220 V, 50 Hz [Singapore model] ............. AC 230 V, 50 Hz Power Consumption [U.S.A. model] ................................... 280 W [Canada model] .................... 310 W/410 VA [Australia and Singapore models] ..... 300 W [China and General models] .............. 310 W Maximum Power Consumption [General model only] 5 ch, 10% THD .................................. 650 W AC Outlets 2 SWITCHED OUTLETS [U.S.A., Canada, Singapore, China and General models] ............. 100 W max. total 1 SWITCHED OUTLET [Australia model] .................... 100 W max. Dimensions (W x H x D) .................................. 435 x 151 x 391 mm (17-1/8” x 5-15/16” x 15-3/8”) Weight .......................... 12.5 kg (27 lbs. 8 oz.) Accessories ......................... AM loop antenna Indoor FM antenna Remote control Batteries Antenna adapter (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Specifications are subject to change without notice. Frequency Response 20 Hz to 15 kHz ................................ 0±1 dB Antenna Input .............. 75 ohms, Unbalanced Output Level [U.S.A., Canada, China and General models] (100% mod., 1 kHz) ...................... 550 mV [Australia and Singapore models] (40 kHz Dev., 1 kHz) ..................... 550 mV 54 01RX-V595a-e/f7 54 6/24/99, 11:47 AM LIST OF MANUFACTURERS’ CODES (Australia model) LISTES DES CODES FABRICANT (Modèle pour l’Australie) TV Abex Acura Admiral Adyson Akai Akura Alaron Alba 0032 0009 0093, 0163, 0213 0217, 0032 0208, 0361 0218, 0264, 0369 0216 0037, 0218, 0371, 0009, 0036, 0235 Allorgan 0294 Amplivision 0217 Amstrad 0371, 0009, 0362, 0369 Anam 0009, 0068 Anitech 0009, 0068, 0076 Arcam 0216, 0217 Asberg 0076 Asuka 0218 Atlantic 0206 Audiosonic 0037, 0109 Autovox 0206, 0076, 0336 BPL 0282 BSR 0294 BTC 0218 Baird 0343 Basic Line 0218, 0009 Baur 0037, 0010, 0554, 0349, 0361 Beko 0370 Beon 0037 Binatone 0217 Blaupunkt 0554, 0191, 0195, 0200, 0213, 0327, 0328 Blue Sky 0218 Blue Star 0282 Bondstec 0247 Boots 0217 Brandt 0109, 0196, 0198, 0205, 0333, 0335 Brionvega 0362 Britannia 0216 Bush 0037, 0218, 0374, 0371, 0294, 0009, 0282, 0036, 0349 CCE 0037, 0217 CGE 0074, 0076, 0084, 0247, 0306 CS Electronics 0216 CTC 0247 Carrefour 0036 Cascade 0009 Cathay 0037 Centurion 0037 Century 0213 Cimline 0009 Clarivox 0037 Clatronic 0370, 0076, 0247 Condor 0370, 0320 Contec 0216, 0009, 0036, 0157 Continental Edison 0196, 0198, 0205, 0333 Crosley 0074, 0076, 0084, 0213 Crown 0037, 0370, 0418, 0009, 0076 Crystal 0431 Curtis Mathes 0093 Cybertron 0218 Daewoo 0037, 0374, 0009 Dainichi 0218, 0215 Dansai 0037 Dayton 0009 De Graaf 0208 Decca 0037, 0072 Dixi 0037, 0009 Dual 0336, 0352 Dual Tec 0217 Dumont 0070 Elbe 0259 Elin 0037 Elite 0218, 0320 Elta 0009 Emerson 0282, 0213, 0361 Erres Expert Ferguson 0037, 0012 0206 0037, 0109, 0005, 0073, 0190, 0238, 0287, 0335, 0343 Fidelity 0216, 0361 Finlandia 0208, 0346, 0359 Finlux 0037, 0072, 0070, 0105, 0346 Firstline 0216, 0217, 0294, 0009, 0321, 0247 Fisher 0370, 0217, 0208, 0303 Flint 0455 Formenti 0037, 0320, 0213 Frontech 0264, 0431, 0163, 0247 Fujitsu 0072, 0206 Funai 0294, 0264, 0303 GE 0282, 0093 GEC 0037, 0217, 0072, 0043, 0205 GPM 0218 Geloso 0009, 0213 Genexxa 0218, 0163 GoldStar 0037, 0217, 0109, 0032, 0290 Goodmans 0037, 0217, 0374, 0371, 0072, 0036, 0235, 0317, 0343 Gorenje 0370 Gradiente 0053 Graetz 0163, 0361 Granada 0037, 0217, 0072, 0146, 0208, 0339, 0359 Grandin 0282 Grundig 0037, 0554, 0070, 0191, 0195, 0205 HCM 0009, 0282 Hanseatic 0037, 0320, 0361 Harley Davidson 0043 Harvard 0068 Hinari 0037, 0218, 0009, 0036 Hisawa 0282, 0455 Hitachi 0217, 0036, 0109, 0032, 0043, 0044, 0105, 0163, 0196, 0198, 0225, 0306, 0349 Huanyu 0216, 0374 Hypson 0037, 0282, 0264 ICE 0217, 0371, 0264 ICeS 0218 ITS 0371 ITT 0163, 0361 Imperial 0370, 0418, 0074, 0076, 0084, 0247 Indiana 0037 Ingelen 0163 Inno Hit 0072 Interbuy 0068 Interfunk 0037, 0163, 0247, 0361 Intervision 0037, 0217, 0264, 0102, 0068 Isukai 0218 JVC 0371, 0036, 0053, 0190, 0192 KTV 0217 Kaisui 0216, 0217, 0218, 0009, 0282 Kamp 0216 Kapsch 0206, 0163 Kawasho 0216 Kendo 0037, 0235, 0362 Kingsley 0216 Kneissel 0259 Korpel 0037 Koyoda 0009 Leyco 0037, 0294, 0072, 0264 Liesenk & Tter 0037 Lloytron 0032 Loewe 0075 Luma 0206 Luxor M Electronic 0349, 0361 0037, 0217, 0374, 0009, 0109, 0068, 0105, 0163, 0287, 0346 MGA 0150 MTC 0216, 0349 Magnadyne 0102, 0247 Magnafon 0102, 0076, 0213 Magnavox 0036 Manesth 0217, 0320, 0264, 0235 Marantz 0037 Mark 0037 Matsui 0037, 0217, 0371, 0294, 0009, 0072, 0036, 0035, 0011, 0208, 0235 Matsushita 0250 McMichael 0043 Mediator 0037, 0012 Memorex 0009, 0250, 0150 Memphis 0337 Metz 0213, 0367 Midland 0032 Minerva 0554, 0070 Minoka 0369 Mitsubishi 0036, 0093, 0108, 0150 Mivar 0216, 0290, 0291, 0292 Motion 0076 Motorola 0093 Multitech 0216, 0217, 0009, 0102, 0076 NEC 0455, 0036 NEI 0037, 0431, 0337 Neckermann 0037, 0554, 0191, 0213, 0349 Nikkai 0037, 0216, 0218, 0072, 0264, 0035, 0032, 0337 Nikko 0317 Nobliko 0102, 0076 Nokia 0361 Nordmende 0109, 0196, 0198, 0213, 0287, 0343 Oceanic 0163, 0215, 0361 Optimus 0250 Optonica 0093 Orion 0037, 0294, 0320, 0321, 0235 Osaki 0217, 0218, 0072, 0264, 0032 Oso 0218 Osume 0072, 0032, 0157 Otake 0317 Otto Versand 0037, 0217, 0320, 0036, 0010, 0554, 0191, 0213, 0343, 0349 Palladium 0370, 0418 Panama 0217, 0264 Panasonic 0250, 0163, 0213, 0214, 0226, 0367 Pathe Cinema 0216, 0320, 0213, 0238 Pathe Marconi 0196, 0198, 0205, 0333 Pausa 0009 Penney 0032 Perdio 0320 Phase 0032 Philco 0074, 0076, 0084, 0213, 0247 Philips 0037, 0374, 0554, 0012, 0043, 0323 Phonola 0037, 0012 Pioneer 0109, 0163, 0287 Profex 0009, 0076, 0361 Proline 0321 Protech 0037, 0217, 0418, 0009, 0264, 0102, 0431, 0247, 0337 Pye 0012 Quasar Quelle 0250 0037, 0010, 0554, 0011, 0070, 0074, 0084, 0200, 0213, 0306, 0327, 0328, 0361 Questa 0036 R-Line 0037 RBM 0070 RCA 0090, 0093 Radio Shack 0032 Radiola 0037, 0012, 0323 Rank Arena 0036 Realistic 0032 Rediffusion 0361 Revox 0037 Rex 0206, 0264, 0163, 0259 Rhapsody 0216 Roadstar 0218, 0418, 0009, 0264 SBR 0037, 0012, 0043 SEG 0217, 0264, 0036, 0076 SEI 0294, 0102, 0213 Saba 0109, 0075, 0163, 0196, 0198, 0205, 0213, 0287, 0335, 0343 Saccs 0238 Saisho 0009, 0264, 0431, 0011, 0235 Salora 0163, 0349, 0359, 0361 Sambers 0102, 0076, 0213 Sampo 0032 Samsung 0037, 0370, 0217, 0009, 0264, 0032, 0090, 0290 Sandra 0216 Sanyo 0072, 0036, 0011, 0146, 0157, 0208, 0213, 0339 Schaub Lorenz 0361 Schneider 0037, 0218, 0371, 0247, 0303, 0323, 0336, 0352 Sears 0146 Sei-Sinudyne 0010 Seleco 0206, 0163, 0259, 0362 Sentra 0035 Sharp 0036, 0093, 0157 Shorai 0294 Siarem 0102, 0213 Siemens 0037, 0554, 0157, 0191, 0195, 0200, 0213, 0327, 0328 Silver 0036 Sinudyne 0294, 0102, 0213, 0235 Solavox 0032, 0163 Sonitron 0208 Sonoko 0037, 0009 Sonolor 0163, 0208, 0215 Sontec 0037 Sony 0036, 0010, 0011 Soundwave 0037, 0418 Standard 0217, 0218, 0009 Stern 0206, 0163, 0259 Sunkai 0294, 0321 Susumu 0218 Sysline 0037 Tandy 0217, 0218, 0072, 0093, 0163 Tashiko 0217, 0036, 0043, 0359 Tatung 0037, 0217, 0072 Tec 0217, 0247 Technema 0320 Technics 0250 Teknika 0150 Teleavia 0205, 0333, 0343 Telefunken 0109, 0005, 0074, 0084, 0101, 0213, 0262, 0306, 0335, 0343 Telemeister 0320 Teletech 0009 Teleton 0217, 0206, 0349 105 03RX-V595a-CODE(EU) 105 6/24/99, 11:51 AM Tensai Texet Thomson 0218, 0294, 0320, 0317 0216, 0218 0109, 0196, 0198, 0205, 0287, 0333, 0343, 0349 Thorn 0037, 0072, 0035, 0074, 0084, 0190, 0192, 0361 Thorn-Ferguson 0343 Tomashi 0282 Toshiba 0036, 0035, 0070, 0243 Trical 0157 Triumph 0243 Uher 0206, 0320, 0303 Ultra 0192 Ultravox 0102 Universum 0037, 0370, 0264, 0105, 0346 Vestel 0037 Victor 0053 Videosat 0247 Videotechnic 0217 Vidtech 0036 Vision 0320 Voxson 0163 Waltham 0217 Watson 0037, 0320 Watt Radio 0102 Wega 0036 White Westinghouse 0037, 0216, 0320 Yoko 0037, 0217, 0264, 0431 Zanussi 0206 CABLE ABC 1003, 1008, 1014, 1017 Birgmingham Cable Communications 1276 British Telecom 1003, 1105 Cabletime 1161, 1271, 1377 Clyde 1086 Contec 1019 Decsat 1423 Filmnet 1443 France Telecom 1451 GEC 1086 General Instrument 1276 GoldStar 1144 Jerrold 1003, 1276, 1014 MNet 1443, 1019 Magnavox 1032 Memorex 1000 Movie Time 1156 NSC 1156 Oak 1019 PVP Stereo Visual Matrix 1003 Panasonic 1000 Paragon 1000 Pioneer 1144, 1260 Pulsar 1000 Runco 1000 STS 1156 Salora 1382 Samsung 1144 Satbox 1375 Scientific Atlanta 1008, 1277, 1017 Starcom 1003 Tele+1 1443 Teleservice 1281 Toshiba 1000 Tudi 1286 United Cable 1003 Videoway 1250 Westminster 1105 Zenith 1000 DBS TUNER AST Alba Aldes Allantide Amstrad Ankaro Anttron Arcon 2321, 2351 2455, 2421, 2362, 2613 2288 2333 2080, 2252, 2345, 2461, 2501 2369, 2288, 2220, 2519, 2217 2421, 2183 2368 Armstrong 2243 Astra 2108, 2539 Astro 2520, 2173, 2358, 2501 Avalon 2396 Axis 2369, 2530 BT 2668 Barcom 2217 Beko 2189 Best 2369, 2217 Blaupunkt 2173 Boca 2243, 2513 Brain Wave 2332 Bush 2067 CNT 2520 Cambridge 2344 Channel Master 2362 Chaparral 2053, 2209 CityCom 2394 Commlink 2288 Connexions 2396 Crown 2243 Cyrus 2200 D-box 2723 DDC 2362 DNT 2396, 2200 Diskxpress 2217 Drake 2268 EIF 2417 Echostar 2396, 2871 Emanon 2421 FTE 2331 Ferguson 2183, 2067, 2189, 2336 Fidelity 2252 Finlux 2455, 2108, 2344, 2397 Fracarro 2871 Freecom 2421, 2335 Fuba 2421, 2369, 2396, 2217, 2297, 2417 G-Sat 2183 Galaxis 2288, 2834, 2863 Galaxisat 2321 GoldStar 2335 Gooding 2571 Goodmans 2189 Grothusen 2335 Grundig 2571, 2173, 2189, 2328 Harting und Helling 2333 Hinari 2183 Hirschmann 2502, 2173, 2573, 2287, 2333, 2397, 2398 Hitachi 2455 Houston 2668 Huth 2243, 2288, 2220, 2346 ITT 2108 InVideo 2871 Intervision 2592 JVC 2571 Johansson 2332 Kathrein 2173, 2200, 2092, 2331, 2358, 2394, 2442, 2480, 2504 Kosmos 2331, 2335 Kreiselmeyer 2173 Kyostar 2421 La Sat 2520, 2513, 2464 Lemon 2692 Lenco 2421, 2335 Lennox 2592 Lupus 2369 Luxor 2573, 2108 Manhattan 2455, 2592, 2520 Marantz 2200 Maspro 2092, 2328, 2336 Matsui 2571, 2344 Mediamarkt 2243 Micro Technology 2333, 2539 Minerva 2571 Morgan’s 2243, 2513 Multistar 2331, 2464 Muratto 2335 Navex 2332 Neuhaus 2501 Neusat 2692, 2834 Newhaus 2220 Nikko 2360 Nokia 2455, 2573, 2108, 2328, 2397, 2873 Nordmende Orbitech Oxford Pace 2362 2501 2344 2455, 2183, 2067, 2328, 2336, 2791 Palcom 2297 Palladium 2571 Palsat 2501 Panda 2455 Philips 2455, 2571, 2200, 2292, 2328 Phonotrend 2288, 2592 Planet 2871 Plasmatic 2442 Polytron 2394 Promax 2455 Prosat 2288 Quadral 2362, 2519 RFT 2288, 2220, 2200 Radiola 2200 Radix 2396, 2882 SAT 2321, 2351, 2461 SEG 2421, 2369, 2539 STVI 2417 Saba 2520, 2336 Sabre 2455 Sagem 2820 Salora 2108 Samsung 2287 SatPartner 2421, 2332, 2520, 2502, 2335, 2692 Satcom 2605, 2346 Satec 2183, 2328 Satmaster 2346 Schwaiger 2183, 2394, 2504 Seemann 2396, 2530 Siemens 2173 Skymaster 2288, 2605, 2519 Star Trak 2421 Strong 2421 Sunstar 2513 TPS 2820 Tantec 2455, 2297, 2336 TechniSat 2262, 2501 Techniland 2346 Telefunken 2421 Teleka 2243, 2613 Telesat 2605 Thomson 2455 Tonna 2668, 2346 Triad 2321, 2333, 2335, 2351 Triasat 2501 Unitor 2332, 2217 Universum 2571, 2173 Vector 2333 Ventana 2200 Vortec 2421 Vtech 2351 Wevasat 2333 Winersat 2332 Wisi 2455, 2396, 2173, 2321, 2351, 2372, 2406, 2407 XSat 2889 Xcom Multimedia 2889 Zehnder 2520, 2321, 2331 VCR ASA Admiral Adventura Aiko Aiwa 3037, 3081 3048 3000 3278 3000, 3037, 3307, 3348, 3352 Akai 3315, 3106, 3041, 3053 Akiba 3072 Alba 3072, 3020, 3278, 3209, 3315, 3352 Ambassador 3020 Amstrad 3000, 3278, 3325, 3332 Anitech 3072 Asha 3240 Asuka 3037 Audiovox 3037 Baird 3000, 3041, 3104, 3107 Basic Line 3072, 3020, 3278 Beaumark 3240 Bell & Howell 3104 106 03RX-V595a-CODE(EU) 106 6/24/99, 11:51 AM Blaupunkt 3034, 3226, 3195, 3003, 3006, 3154, 3162, 3227, 3403 Brandt 3320, 3187, 3321 Brandt Electronic 3041 Broksonic 3209 Bush 3072, 3278, 3209, 3352 CCE 3072, 3278 CGE 3000 Calix 3037 Capehart 3020 Carver 3081 Catron 3020 Cimline 3072 Cineral 3278 Citizen 3037, 3278 Clatronic 3020 Colt 3072 Combitech 3352 Condor 3020 Craig 3072, 3037, 3047, 3240 Crown 3072, 3020, 3278 Curtis Mathes 3041, 3162 Cybernex 3240 Cyrus 3081 Daewoo 3020, 3278, 3045 Dansai 3072 Daytron 3020 De Graaf 3042, 3166 Decca 3000, 3081 Denon 3042 Dual 3041 Dumont 3000, 3081, 3104 Dynatech 3000 ESC 3278, 3240 Elbe 3038 Elcatech 3072 Electrohome 3037 Electrophonic 3037 Emerex 3032 Emerson 3000, 3037, 3278, 3209, 3036, 3043, 3088 Ferguson 3320, 3041, 3107, 3321 Fidelity 3000 Finlandia 3081, 3104 Finlux 3000, 3081, 3042, 3104 Firstline 3072, 3037, 3209, 3045, 3043 Fisher 3046, 3047, 3054, 3104 Frontech 3020 Fuji 3033 Funai 3000 GE 3048, 3240 GEC 3081 Garrard 3000 General 3020 Go Video 3432 GoldHand 3072 GoldStar 3037, 3038, 3225 Goodmans 3072, 3000, 3020, 3037, 3278, 3403 Gradiente 3000, 3008 Graetz 3005, 3041, 3104, 3240 Granada 3081, 3046, 3104 Grandin 3072, 3000, 3037 Grundig 3072, 3081, 3347, 3226, 3195, 3003, 3006, 3007, 3207, 3349, 3403 HCM 3072 HI-Q 3047 Hanseatic 3037 Harley Davidson 3000 Harman/Kardon 3038 Harwood 3072 Headquarter 3046 Hinari 3072, 3004, 3240, 3352 Hitachi 3000, 3004, 3042, 3041, 3166, 3235, 3240 Hypson 3072 ITT 3106, 3046, 3384, 3005, 3041, 3104, 3240 ITV 3037, 3278 Imperial 3000 Ingersol 3004 Interfunk 3081 JVC 3067, 3384, 3008, 3041, 3206, 3207, 3486 Jensen KEC KLH Kaisui Kendo Kenwood 3041 3037, 3278 3072 3072 3209, 3106 3067, 3384, 3038, 3041 Kodak 3037 Korpel 3072 LXI 3037 Lenco 3278 Leyco 3072 LIoyd’s 3000 Loewe 3037, 3004, 3081, 3006 Logik 3072, 3004, 3240 Luxor 3106, 3048, 3046, 3043, 3104 M Electronic 3000 MGA 3043, 3240 MGN Technology 3240 MTC 3000, 3240 Magnasonic 3278 Magnavox 3000, 3081 Magnin 3240 Manesth 3072, 3045 Marantz 3081, 3003, 3006 Marta 3037 Matsui 3209, 3004, 3036, 3088, 3348, 3352 Matsushita 3162 Memorex 3000, 3037, 3048, 3046, 3047, 3104, 3162, 3240, 3307 Memphis 3072 Metz 3347, 3195, 3003, 3006, 3162, 3227 Minerva 3195, 3006 Minolta 3042 Mitsubishi 3081, 3067, 3048, 3043 Motorola 3048 Multitech 3072, 3000 Murphy 3000 NEC 3067, 3038, 3041, 3104 Neckermann 3081 Nesco 3072 Nikko 3037 Nikon 3034 Noblex 3240 Nokia 3106, 3046, 3041, 3104, 3240 Nordmende 3320, 3384, 3041, 3297, 3321 Oceanic 3000, 3041 Okano 3315, 3348 Olympus 3226 Optimus 3037, 3432, 3048, 3104, 3162 Orion 3209, 3004, 3036, 3088, 3348, 3352 Osaki 3072, 3000, 3037 Otto Versand 3081 Palladium 3072, 3037, 3006, 3041 Panasonic 3226, 3162, 3225, 3227 Pathe Cinema 3036 Pathe Marconi 3041 Penney 3037, 3042, 3038, 3054, 3240 Pentax 3042 Perdio 3000 Philco 3209, 3038 Philips 3081, 3384, 3403 Phonola 3081 Pilot 3037 Pioneer 3081, 3067, 3162, 3235 Portland 3020 Profex 3322 Profitronic 3240 Proline 3000 Protec 3072 Pye 3081 Quarter 3046 Quartz 3046 Quasar 3162 Quelle 3081 RCA 3106, 3042, 3048, 3240 RFT 3403 Radio Shack Radiola Radix Randex Realistic 3000, 3037 3081 3037 3037 3000, 3037, 3048, 3046, 3047, 3104 Rex 3384, 3041 Ricoh 3034 Roadstar 3072, 3037, 3278, 3240 SBR 3081 SEG 3322, 3240 SEI 3004, 3081 STS 3042 Saba 3320, 3384, 3041, 3206, 3207, 3297, 3321 Saisho 3209, 3004, 3036, 3088 Salora 3106, 3046, 3043 Samsung 3432, 3045, 3053, 3240 Sanky 3048 Sansui 3000, 3067, 3041 Sanyo 3046, 3047, 3104, 3240 Saville 3352 Schaub Lorenz 3000, 3005, 3041, 3104 Schneider 3072, 3000, 3081 Scott 3045, 3043 Sears 3000, 3037, 3042, 3046, 3047, 3054, 3104 Seleco 3041 Semp 3045 Sentra 3020 Sharp 3048 Shintom 3072, 3104 Shogun 3240 Shorai 3004 Siemens 3037, 3081, 3195, 3003, 3006, 3054, 3104 Silva 3037 Singer 3072, 3045 Sinudyne 3004, 3081 Solavox 3020 Sonolor 3046 Sontec 3037 Sony 3000, 3032, 3033, 3034, 3011 Sunkai 3348 Sunstar 3000 Suntronic 3000 Sylvania 3000, 3081, 3043 Symphonic 3000 TMK 3036, 3240 Tashiko 3000 Tatung 3000, 3081, 3041 Teac 3000, 3041 Tec 3020 Technics 3226, 3162 Teknika 3000, 3037 Teleavia 3041 Telefunken 3320, 3384, 3041, 3187, 3321 Tenosal 3072 Tensai 3322, 3000 Thomas 3000 Thomson 3320, 3384, 3041 Thorn 3036, 3041, 3104 Toshiba 3081, 3045, 3384, 3041, 3043 Totevision 3037, 3240 Towada 3322 Uher 3240 Unitech 3240 Universum 3000, 3037, 3081, 3106, 3195, 3006, 3240, 3325 Vector 3045 Vector Research 3038 Video Concepts 3045 Videosonic 3240 Wards 3072, 3000, 3081, 3042, 3048, 3047, 3240 White Westinghouse 3278 XR-1000 3072, 3000 Yamaha 3038 Yamishi 3072 Yokan 3072 Yoko 3020, 3240 Zenith 3000, 3033, 3034 DVD PLAYER Kenwood Magnavox Onkyo Panasonic Philips Pioneer Sony Technics Thomson Toshiba Yamaha Zenith 4534 4503 4503 4490 4539, 4503 4525 4533 4490 4551 4503 4490, 4545 4503 LD PLAYER Aiwa Carver Cyrus Denon Disco Vision Funai Hitachi Magnavox Marantz Mitsubishi NAD Panasonic Philips Pioneer Quasar Radiola Realistic Salora Sega Sharp Sony Technics Telefunken Theta Digital Thorn Yamaha 5203 5064, 5194 5388 5059, 5172 5023 5203 5023 5194, 5217 5064, 5194 5059 5059 5204, 5496 5064, 5388, 5194 5023, 5059 5204 5388 5203 5064 5023 5001 5193, 5201 5204, 5496 5059 5194 5014 5217 Micromega Mission Mitsubishi NAD NSM Naim Nikko Onkyo Optimus 6157 6157 6108, 6156 6000 6157 6157 6525, 6164 6101, 6102 6000, 6032, 6037, 6536, 6048, 6179, 6196, 6342 6303, 6029, 6367 6157, 6274, 6287 6032 6164 6157 6157 6157 6029 6179 6164, 6179 6157, 6113 6461, 6525, 6527 6157 6157 6157, 6202, 6513 6048, 6179, 6342 6134 6164 6037, 6262, 6265 6114, 6196 6516 6108 6000, 6490 6378 6207, 6303, 6029 6481 6157 6072 6157, 6108 6036, 6082, 6187, 6712 6461 Panasonic Philips Pioneer Poppy Proton QED Quad Quasar RCA Realistic Revox Roadstar Rotel SAE Sansui Sanyo Schneider Scott Sharp Sherwood Siemens Signature Sony Teac Technics Toshiba Universum Victor Wards Yamaha Yorx CD PLAYER MD RECORDER Aiwa 6124, 6157, 6419 Akai 6108, 6156, 6199 Alba 6536, 6288, 6334 Arcam 6157 Audio Research 6157 Audio Ton 6157 Audiolab 6157 Audiomeca 6157 BSR 6134 Bestar 6164 Binatone 6452 California Audio Lab 6029 Carver 6157, 6179 Condor 6134, 6164 Cyrus 6157 DKK 6000 Denon 6003, 6034 Dual 6196 Emerson 6164 Fisher 6048, 6179, 6342 GE 6334 Genexxa 6032, 6164 GoldStar 6525, 6383 Goodmans 6536 Grundig 6157 Harman/Kardon 6108, 6173 Hitachi 6032, 6291 JVC 6072 Kenwood 6037, 6523, 6028, 6048, 6190 Kodak 6287 Krell 6157 Linn 6157 Luxman 6328 M Electronic 6525 MCS 6029 Magnavox 6157, 6038, 6129 Marantz 6157, 6029, 6038, 6129 Matsui 6157, 6288, 6307 Mclntosh 6287 Memorex 6032, 6164 Meridian 6157 Kenwood Sony Yamaha 7826 7490 7888, 7490 TAPE DECK Aiwa Akai Arcam Carver Denon Fisher Grundig Harman/Kardon JVC Kenwood Magnavox Marantz Memorex Mitsubishi Onkyo Optimus Panasonic Philips Pioneer Revox Sansui Sanyo Sharp Sony Technics Victor Wards Yamaha 8029, 8197, 8200 8188, 8189 8076 8029 8076, 8412 8074 8029 8182 8244, 8273, 8274 8070, 8071, 8092, 8205, 8233, 8234 8029 8029, 8009 8099, 8101 8189 8136, 8135 8027, 8220 8229 8029 8027, 8099, 8101, 8220 8029 8029, 8009 8074 8205 8170, 8243 8229 8273, 8274 8027 8094, 8097, 8205, 8478, 8524 107 03RX-V595a-CODE(EU) 107 6/24/99, 11:51 AM LIST OF MANUFACTURERS’ CODES (U.S.A, Canada and China models) LISTES DES CODES FABRICANT (Modèles pour les Etats-Unis, le Canada et la Chine) Elta Emerson TV A-Mark AOC 0003 0030, 0019, 0003, 0052, 0185 Abex 0032 Acura 0009 Admiral 0093 Adventura 0046 Adyson 0032 Aiko 0092 Akai 0030, 0208 Akura 0264 Alaron 0179, 0216 Alba 0009, 0037 Ambassador 0177 Amstrad 0009, 0171, 0177 Anam 0180, 0004, 0009, 0068 Anam National 0161 Anitech 0009, 0068 Arcam 0216 Archer 0003 Audinac 0391 Audiosonic 0037, 0109 Audiovox 0451, 0180, 0003, 0092 BPL 0282 Basic Line 0009 Baur 0037, 0512, 0535, 0554 Baysonic 0180 Belcor 0019 Bell & Howell 0154, 0016 Beon 0037 Blaupunkt 0535, 0554 Blue Star 0282 Bradford 0180 Brandt 0109 Britannia 0216 Brockwood 0019 Broksonic 0236, 0463, 0003, 0426 Bush 0282, 0009, 0037 CCE 0037 CS Electronics 0216 CXC 0180 Candle 0030, 0056, 0046, 0186 Carnivale 0030 Carver 0054, 0170 Cascade 0009 Cathay 0037 Celebrity 0000 Centurion 0037 Cimline 0009 Cineral 0451, 0092 Citizen 0060, 0030, 0056, 0039, 0046, 0092, 0186, 0280 Clairtone 0185 Clarivox 0037 Concerto 0056 Contec 0180, 0009, 0185, 0216 Craig 0180, 0161 Crosley 0054 Crown 0180, 0039, 0009, 0037, 0418 Curtis Mathes 0047, 0054, 0154, 0051, 0451, 0093, 0060, 0030, 0145, 0056, 0016, 0039, 0166 Daewoo 0451, 0019, 0039, 0009, 0037, 0066, 0092 Dansai 0037 Dayton 0009 Daytron 0019 De Graaf 0208 Decca 0037 Denon 0145 Dixi 0004, 0009, 0037 Dumont 0017, 0019 Ectec 0391 Electroband 0000, 0185 Elin 0037 0009 0154, 0236, 0463, 0180, 0282, 0178, 0019, 0179, 0039, 0177, 0185, 0280 Envision 0030 Erres 0037 Ferguson 0037, 0109, 0287, 0560 Fidelity 0216 Finlandia 0208 Finlux 0179, 0037 Firstline 0009, 0216 Fisher 0154, 0159, 0208 Formenti 0037 Frontech 0264 Fujitsu 0179 Funai 0180, 0179, 0171, 0264 Futuretech 0180 GE 0047, 0051, 0451, 0093, 0282, 0178, 0021, 0135 GEC 0037 Geloso 0009 Gibralter 0017, 0030, 0019 GoldStar 0030, 0178, 0019, 0056, 0001, 0002, 0032, 0037, 0109 Goodmans 0179, 0037 Gradiente 0053, 0056, 0170 Granada 0037, 0208, 0339, 0502 Grandin 0282 Grundig 0037, 0535, 0554 Grunpy 0180, 0179 HCM 0282, 0009 Hallmark 0178 Hanseatic 0037 Harley Davidson 0179 Harvard 0180, 0068 Hinari 0179, 0009, 0037, 0283 Hisawa 0282 Hitachi 0145, 0056, 0032, 0109, 0151, 0576 Huanyu 0216 Hypson 0282, 0037, 0264 ICE 0264 ITT 0283 Imperial 0418 Indiana 0037 Infinity 0054 Inteq 0017 Interbuy 0068 Interfunk 0037, 0512 Intervision 0037, 0068, 0264 JBL 0054 JCB 0000 JEC 0502 JVC 0053, 0069, 0160 Janeil 0046 KEC 0180 KTV 0180, 0030, 0039, 0185, 0280 Kaisui 0282, 0009, 0216 Kamp 0216 Kawasho 0216 Kaypani 0052 Kendo 0037 Kenwood 0030, 0019 Kingsley 0216 Kloss 0046 Korpel 0037 Koyoda 0009 LG 0056 LXI 0047, 0054, 0154, 0156, 0178 Leyco 0037, 0264 Liesenk & Tter 0037 Lloytron 0032 Loewe 0512 Logik 0016, 0001 Luxman 0056 M Electronic 0009, 0037, 0068, 0109, 0287 MEI 0185 MGA 0150, 0030, 0178, 0019 MTC 0060, 0030, 0019, 0056, 0185, 0216, 0512 Magnavox 0054, 0030, 0179, 0186, 0187 Majestic 0016 Manesth 0264 Marantz 0054, 0030, 0037 Mark 0037 Matsui 0009, 0035, 0037, 0177, 0208 Matsushita 0250 Mediator 0037 Megatron 0178, 0145, 0003 Memorex 0154, 0250, 0150, 0178, 0056, 0016, 0009 Metz 0535 Midland 0047, 0017, 0051, 0039, 0032, 0135 Minerva 0535, 0554 Minutz 0021 Mitsubishi 0093, 0150, 0178, 0019, 0512, 0535 Mivar 0216 Motorola 0093 Multitech 0180, 0009, 0216 NAD 0156, 0178, 0166 NEC 0030, 0019, 0056, 0170 NEI 0037 NTC 0092 Neckermann 0037, 0554 Nesco 0179 Nikkai 0032, 0035, 0037, 0216, 0264 Nikko 0030, 0178, 0092 Nisato 0391 Nordmende 0109, 0287, 0560 Noshi 0018 Onwa 0180 Optimus 0154, 0250, 0166 Optonica 0093, 0165 Orion 0236, 0463, 0179, 0037, 0177 Osaki 0032, 0264 Osume 0032 Otto Versand 0037, 0512, 0535, 0554 Palladium 0418 Panama 0264 Panasonic 0051, 0250, 0226 Pathe Cinema 0216 Pausa 0009 Penney 0047, 0156, 0051, 0060, 0030, 0178, 0021, 0019, 0018, 0056, 0039, 0002, 0003, 0032, 0135, 0149 Phase 0032 Philco 0054, 0463, 0030, 0145, 0019 Philips 0054, 0037, 0554 Phonola 0037 Pilot 0030, 0019, 0039 Pioneer 0109, 0166, 0287 Portland 0019, 0039, 0092 Prism 0051 Profex 0009 Proscan 0047 Protech 0009, 0037, 0264, 0418 Proton 0178, 0003, 0052 Pulsar 0017, 0019 Quasar 0051, 0250, 0165 Quelle 0037, 0252, 0512, 0535, 0554 R-Line 0037 RCA 0047, 0051, 0093, 0019, 0018, 0090, 0135 Radio Shack 0047, 0154, 0165, 0180, 0030, 0178, 0019, 0056, 0039, 0032 Radiola 0037 Realistic 0154, 0165, 0180, 0030, 0178, 0019, 0056, 0039, 0032 108 03RX-V595a-CODE(US) 108 6/24/99, 11:51 AM Revox Rex Rhapsody Roadstar Runco SBR SEG SEI SSS Saba Saisho Sampo Samsung 0037 0264 0185, 0216 0009, 0264, 0418 0017, 0030 0037 0264 0177 0180, 0019 0109, 0287 0009, 0177, 0264 0030, 0039, 0032, 0052 0060, 0030, 0178, 0019, 0056, 0039, 0009, 0032, 0037, 0090, 0264, 0427 Samsux 0039 Sandra 0216 Sansei 0451 Sansui 0463 Sanyo 0154, 0159, 0208, 0339 Schneider 0037 Scimitsu 0019 Scotch 0178 Scott 0236, 0180, 0178, 0019, 0179 Sears 0047, 0054, 0154, 0156, 0178, 0179, 0056, 0149, 0159, 0171 Semivox 0180 Semp 0156 Sentra 0035, 0283 Sharp 0093, 0165, 0039 Shogun 0019 Siemens 0037, 0535, 0554 Signature 0016 Simpson 0186, 0187 Sinudyne 0177 Solavox 0032 Sonitron 0208 Sonoko 0009, 0037 Sonolor 0208 Sontec 0037 Sony 0000, 0080 Soundesign 0180, 0178, 0179, 0186 Soundwave 0037, 0418 Spectricon 0003 Squareview 0171 Standard 0009 Starlite 0180 Supra 0056 Supre-Macy 0046 Supreme 0000 Sylvania 0054, 0030 Symphonic 0171 Sysline 0037 TMK 0178, 0056, 0177 Tandy 0093 Tatung 0003, 0037 Technics 0051, 0250 Technol Ace 0179 Techwood 0051, 0056, 0003 Teknika 0054, 0180, 0150, 0060, 0019, 0179, 0056, 0016, 0039, 0092, 0186 Telefunken 0056, 0109, 0252 Teletech 0009 Teleton 0186 Texet 0216 Thomson 0109, 0287 Thorn 0035, 0037, 0512, 0535 Tomashi 0282 Toshiba 0154, 0156, 0060, 0035, 0149, 0502 Tosonic 0185 Totevision 0039 Triumph 0177 Ultra 0391 Universum 0037, 0264, 0535 Vector Research 0030 Vestel 0037 Victor 0053 Vidikron 0054 Vidtech Viking Wards 0178, 0019 0046 0054, 0165, 0030, 0178, 0021, 0019, 0179, 0056, 0016, 0080 Watson 0037 White Westinghouse 0037, 0216 Yamaha 0030, 0019 Yoko 0037, 0264 Zenith 0017, 0016, 0092 Zonda 0003 CABLE ABC 1003, 1008, 1014, 1011 Allegro 1315 Archer 1797 BBT 1267 Belcor 1056 British Telecom 1003 Cable Star 1056 Citizen 1315 Colour Voice 1031 Comtronics 1040 Contec 1019 Emerson 1797 Everquest 1015, 1040 Focus 1400 GC Electronics 1056 Gemini 1015 General Instrument 1476, 1011 GoldStar 1144, 1040 Goodmind 1797 Hamlin 1020, 1259, 1009, 1034 Hitachi 1011 Jasco 1315 Jerrold 1003, 1012, 1476, 1014, 1015, 1011, 1024 MNet 1019 Magnavox 1027 Memorex 1000 Movie Time 1063 NSC 1063 Novaplex 1618 Oak 1019 Optimus 1021 PVP Stereo Visual Matrix 1003 Panasonic 1000, 1107, 1021 Paragon 1000 Philips 1027, 1031 Pioneer 1144, 1533 Popular Mechanics 1400 Prelude 1770 Pulsar 1000 RCA 1021 Radio Shack 1015, 1315 Recoton 1400 Regal 1020, 1259 Rembrandt 1011 Runco 1000 SL Marx 1040 Samsung 1144, 1040 Scientific Atlanta 1008, 1477 Signal 1015, 1040 Signature 1011 Sprucer 1021 StarSight 1422 Starcom 1003, 1015 Stargate 1015, 1040, 1770, 1797 Starquest 1015 TV86 1063 TeleCaption 1221 Teleview 1040 Timeless 1418 Tocom 1012 Toshiba 1000 Tusa 1015 United Cable 1003 Universal 1056, 1191 Viewstar 1063, 1027 Zenith 1000, 1054, 1525 Zentek 1400 DBS TUNER AST Audio Ton Avalon Chaparral 2321 2364 2396 2053, 2209 Connexions DNT Echostar Elta Expressvu Fuba Galaxis Galaxisat General Instrument Huth JSR JVC Jerrold Lemon NEC Neusat Next-Wave Primestar Radix SAT SatPartner Seemann Triad Wisi Zehnder 2396 2396 2396 2364 2775 2396 2364 2321 2361 2364 2364 2775 2361 2692 2507 2692 2732 2361 2396 2321 2692 2396 2321 2321, 2396 2321 (DSS) AlphaStar Echostar General Instrument HTS Hitachi Hughes Network System Jerrold Magnavox Memorex Panasonic Philips Primestar RCA Sony Star Choice Toshiba Uniden 2772 2775 2869 2775 2819 2749 2627 2724 2724 2701 2724 2627 2566 2639 2869 2790 2724 VCR ASA Admiral Adventura Aiko Aiwa Akai Akiba Akura Alba 3037, 3081 3048 3000 3278 3037, 3000 3041, 3061, 3281, 3288 3072 3271 3209, 3072, 3278, 3020, 3295 Ambassador 3020 American High 3035 Amstrad 3000, 3278 Anitech 3072 Asha 3240 Asuka 3037 Audiovox 3037 Baird 3000, 3104, 3041 Basic Line 3072, 3278, 3020 Beaumark 3240 Bell & Howell 3104 Blaupunkt 3162, 3034, 3195, 3226, 3227 Brandt 3187, 3320 Brandt Electronic 3041 Broksonic 3184, 3121, 3209, 3002, 3295, 3361, 3479 Bush 3209, 3072, 3278 CCE 3072, 3278 CGE 3000 Calix 3037 Canon 3035 Capehart 3020 Carver 3081 Catron 3020 Cimline 3072 Cineral 3278 Citizen 3037, 3278 Clatronic Colt Condor Craig 3020 3072 3020 3037, 3047, 3240, 3072, 3271 Crown 3072, 3278, 3020 Curtis Mathes 3060, 3035, 3041, 3162 Cybernex 3240 Cyrus 3081 Daewoo 3045, 3278, 3020 Dansai 3072 Daytron 3020 De Graaf 3042, 3166 Decca 3081, 3000 Denon 3042 Dual 3041 Dumont 3081, 3000, 3104 Dynatech 3000 ESC 3240, 3278 Elbe 3038 Elcatech 3072 Electrohome 3037 Electrophonic 3037 Emerex 3032 Emerson 3037, 3184, 3000, 3121, 3043, 3209, 3002, 3278, 3036, 3061, 3068, 3208, 3212, 3295, 3361, 3479 Ferguson 3041, 3320 Fidelity 3000 Finlandia 3081, 3104 Finlux 3081, 3000, 3042, 3104 Firstline 3037, 3045, 3043, 3209, 3072 Fisher 3047, 3104, 3046, 3054, 3066 Frontech 3020 Fuji 3035, 3033 Funai 3000 GE 3060, 3035, 3048, 3240, 3202 GEC 3081 Garrard 3000 General 3020 GoldHand 3072 GoldStar 3037, 3038, 3225, 3471 Goodmans 3037, 3000, 3072, 3278, 3062, 3020 Gradiente 3000, 3008 Graetz 3240, 3104, 3041 Granada 3081, 3104, 3046 Grandin 3037, 3000, 3072 Grundig 3081, 3072, 3195, 3226 HCM 3072 HI-Q 3047 Hanseatic 3037 Harley Davidson 3000 Harman/Kardon 3038 Harwood 3072, 3068 Headquarter 3046 Hinari 3240, 3072, 3208 Hitachi 3240, 3000, 3042, 3041, 3166, 3235 Hypson 3072 ITT 3240, 3104, 3041, 3046, 3384 ITV 3037, 3278 Imperial 3000 Interfunk 3081 JVC 3067, 3041, 3008, 3384 Jensen 3041 KEC 3037, 3278 KLH 3072 Kaisui 3072 Kendo 3209 Kenwood 3067, 3041, 3038, 3384 Kodak 3035, 3037 Korpel 3072 LXI 3037 Lenco 3278 Leyco 3072 LIoyd’s 3000, 3208 Loewe 3037, 3081 Logik Luxor 3240, 3072 3048, 3104, 3043, 3062, 3046 M Electronic 3000 MEI 3035 MGA 3240, 3043, 3061 MGN Technology 3240 MTC 3240, 3000 Magnasonic 3278 Magnavox 3035, 3039, 3081, 3000 Magnin 3240 Manesth 3045, 3072 Marantz 3035, 3081, 3062, 3295 Marta 3037 Matsui 3209, 3036, 3208, 3295 Matsushita 3035, 3162 Memorex 3035, 3037, 3048, 3039, 3047, 3240, 3000, 3104, 3162, 3046 Memphis 3072 Metz 3162, 3195, 3227 Minerva 3195 Minolta 3042 Mitsubishi 3048, 3081, 3067, 3043, 3061, 3173, 3196 Motorola 3035, 3048 Multitech 3000, 3072 Murphy 3000 NEC 3104, 3067, 3041, 3038, 3040 Neckermann 3081 Nesco 3072 Nikko 3037 Nikon 3034 Noblex 3240 Nokia 3240, 3104, 3041, 3046 Nordmende 3041, 3320, 3384 Oceanic 3000, 3041 Olympus 3035, 3226 Optimus 3037, 3048, 3104, 3162 Optonica 3062 Orion 3184, 3121, 3209, 3002, 3036, 3208, 3295, 3479 Osaki 3037, 3000, 3072 Otto Versand 3081 Palladium 3037, 3041, 3072 Panasonic 3035, 3162, 3225, 3226, 3227 Pathe Cinema 3036 Pathe Marconi 3041 Penney 3035, 3037, 3240, 3042, 3038, 3040, 3054 Pentax 3042 Perdio 3000 Philco 3035, 3209, 3038, 3479 Philips 3035, 3081, 3062, 3384 Phonola 3081 Pilot 3037 Pioneer 3081, 3067, 3162, 3235 Portland 3020 Profitronic 3240 Proline 3000 Proscan 3060, 3202 Protec 3072 Pulsar 3039 Pye 3081 Quarter 3046 Quartz 3046 Quasar 3035, 3162 Quelle 3081 RCA 3060, 3035, 3048, 3240, 3042, 3202 Radio Shack 3037, 3000 Radiola 3081 Radix 3037 Randex 3037 Realistic 3035, 3037, 3048, 3047, 3000, 3104, 3062, 3046, 3066 Rex 3041, 3384 Ricoh 3034 Roadstar 3037, 3240, 3072, 3278 Runco 3039 SBR 3081 109 03RX-V595a-CODE(US) 109 6/24/99, 11:51 AM SEG SEI STS Saba Saisho Salora Samsung Sanky Sansui 3240 3081 3042 3041, 3320, 3384 3209, 3036, 3208 3043, 3046 3240, 3045 3048, 3039 3000, 3067, 3041, 3271, 3479 Sanyo 3047, 3240, 3104, 3046 Schaub Lorenz 3000, 3104, 3041 Schneider 3081, 3000, 3072 Scott 3184, 3045, 3121, 3043, 3212 Sears 3035, 3037, 3047, 3000, 3042, 3104, 3046, 3054, 3066 Seleco 3041 Semp 3045 Sentra 3020 Sharp 3048, 3062 Shintom 3104, 3072 Shogun 3240 Siemens 3037, 3081, 3104, 3054, 3195 Silva 3037 Singer 3045, 3072 Sinudyne 3081 Solavox 3020 Sonolor 3046 Sontec 3037 Sony 3035, 3032, 3000, 3033, 3034 Sunstar 3000 Suntronic 3000 Sylvania 3035, 3081, 3000, 3043 Symphonic 3000 TMK 3240, 3036, 3208 Tashiko 3000 Tatung 3081, 3000, 3041 Teac 3000, 3041 Tec 3020 Technics 3035, 3162, 3226 Teknika 3035, 3037, 3000 Teleavia 3041 Telefunken 3041, 3187, 3320, 3384 Tenosal 3072 Tensai 3000 Thomas 3000 Thomson 3041, 3320, 3384 Thorn 3104, 3041, 3036 Toshiba 3081, 3045, 3043, 3041, 3066, 3212, 3366, 3384 Totevision 3037, 3240 Triumph 3208 Uher 3240 Unitech 3240 Universum 3037, 3081, 3240, 3000, 3195 Vector 3045 Vector Research 3038, 3040 Video Concepts 3045, 3040, 3061 Videosonic 3240 Wards 3060, 3035, 3048, 3047, 3081, 3240, 3000, 3042, 3072, 3062, 3212 White Westinghouse 3278 XR-1000 3035, 3000, 3072 Yamaha 3038 Yamishi 3072 Yokan 3072 Yoko 3240, 3020 Zenith 3039, 3000, 3033, 3034 DVD PLAYER JVC Kenwood Magnavox Mitsubishi Onkyo Panasonic Philips Pioneer Proscan RCA Sony Technics Toshiba Yamaha Zenith 4558 4534 4503 4521 4503 4490 4503, 4539 4525 4522 4522 4533 4490 4503 4490, 4545 4503 LD PLAYER Aiwa Carver Denon Disco Vision Funai Hitachi Magnavox Marantz Mitsubishi NAD Panasonic Philips Pioneer Quasar Realistic Salora Samsung Sega Sony Technics Telefunken Theta Digital Yamaha 5203 5064, 5194, 5323 5059, 5172 5023 5203 5023 5194, 5217 5064, 5194 5059 5059 5204 5064, 5194 5059, 5023 5204 5203 5064 5323 5023 5193, 5201 5204 5059 5194 5217 CD PLAYER ADC 6018 Acoustic Research 6420 Adcom 6155 Aiwa 6157, 6012, 6124 Akai 6156 Arcam 6157 Audio Pro 6437 Audio Research 6157 Audio-Technica 6170 Audio Ton 6157 Audiolab 6157 Audiomeca 6157 BSR 6245 Bestar 6164 Burmester 6420 Bush 6245 California Audio Lab 6029 Carver 6157, 6179, 6437 Condor 6164 Crown 6122 Cyrus 6157 DAK 6245 DKK 6000 Denon 6003, 6034 Elektra 6393, 6437 Emerson 6305, 6155, 6164 Fisher 6179, 6048, 6088, 6342 Garrard 6420, 6393, 6245, 6280, 6425 Genexxa 6032, 6305, 6164, 6426 Goodmans Grundig Harman/Kardon Hitachi JVC Kenwood 6305, 6245, 6280 6157 6426 6032, 6155 6072 6028, 6037, 6190, 6048 Kodak 6287 Krell 6157 Kyocera 6018 LXI 6305 Linn 6157 Luxman 6093 MCS 6029, 6043 MTC 6420 Magnavox 6157, 6305 Marantz 6029, 6157, 6180 Matsui 6157 Mclntosh 6287 Memorex 6032, 6305, 6155, 6164, 6180 Meridian 6157 Micromega 6157 Mission 6157 Mitsubishi 6156 NAD 6000 NEC 6043 NSM 6157 Nagaoka 6018 Naim 6157 Nakamichi 6147 Nikko 6164, 6170 Onkyo 6101 Optimus 6000, 6032, 6179, 6305, 6037, 6420, 6048, 6145, 6468, 6087, 6280, 6342, 6426, 6437 Panasonic 6029, 6303 Parasound 6420 Philips 6157, 6287 Pioneer 6032, 6305, 6468, 6244 Poppy 6164 Proton 6157 QED 6157 Quad 6157 Quasar 6029 RCA 6179, 6305, 6053, 6155 Realistic 6179, 6420, 6155, 6164, 6180 Revox 6157 Roadstar 6461 Rotel 6157, 6420 Royal 6420 SAE 6157 STS 6018 Sansui 6157, 6305, 6202 Sanyo 6179, 6048, 6087, 6342 Scott 6305, 6155, 6164 Sears 6305 Sharp 6037, 6180, 6261 Sherwood 6114, 6180, 6426 Shure 6043 Sony 6000, 6185 Soundesign 6145, 6425 Tascam 6420 Teac 6420, 6393, 6180 Technics 6029, 6303 Universum 6157, 6437 Victor 6072 Wards 6157, 6053 Yamaha 6036, 6187, 6261, 6082, 6712 Yorx 6461 110 03RX-V595a-CODE(US) 110 6/24/99, 11:51 AM MD RECORDER Kenwood Sony Yamaha 7826 7490 7888, 7490 TAPE DECK ADC Aiwa Akai Arcam Carver Denon Fisher Garrard GoldStar Grundig JVC Kenwood Kyocera Magnavox Marantz Memorex Mitsubishi Onkyo Optimus Panasonic Philips Phonotrend Pioneer Revox Sansui Sanyo Sharp Sherwood Sonic Sony Teac Technics Universum Victor Wards Yamaha 8171 8029, 8197 8283 8076 8029 8076 8074 8308, 8309, 8375 8375 8029, 8375 8244, 8274, 8303, 8304, 8310 8071, 8092, 8233, 8234 8171 8029 8029, 8009 8099 8283 8136, 8282 8027, 8220, 8337 8229 8029 8337 8027, 8220, 8099 8029, 8190 8029, 8009 8074 8231 8337 8375 8243, 8170, 8291 8280, 8289, 8308, 8309 8229 8375 8274 8027 8097, 8094, 8478, 8524 U C AT HTR-5150 HTR-5150 Natural Sound AV Receiver Ampli-Tuner audio-vidéo YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA OWNER’S MANUAL MODE D’EMPLOI ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA Printed in Malaysia ID 04HTR-5150-e/f cv1/4 1 V403350 6/28/99, 2:31 PM Quick Reference Card TAPE/MD AMP/TUN POWER STANDBY CD DVD/LD POWER POWER POWER INPUT INPUT INPUT DISC SKIP DISC SKIP SELECTOR DIAL INPUT EXT. DEC. TEST A/B/C/D/E DSP PRESET UP DOWN VOLUME MUTE EFFECT ON/OFF TV VOLUME TV VOLUME TV VOLUME TV VOLUME TV POWER DISPLAY (MD) SLEEP TV POWER REC/PAUSE DIR A (TAPE) SKIP (MD) PLAY SET MENU TIME/LEVEL REWIND (TAPE) SEARCH (MD) DISPLAY DISPLAY TV POWER DECK A/B (TAPE) PAUSE (MD) DIR B (TAPE) SKIP (MD) STOP FAST FORWARD (TAPE) SEARCH (MD) SKIP PLAY SEARCH TV POWER TV INPUT PAUSE STOP SEARCH SKIP/SEARCH PLAY TV INPUT PAUSE STOP SUBTITLE (DVD) SEARCH (LD) ANGLE (DVD) SEARCH (LD) SUBTITLE ON/OFF (DVD) AUDIO (DVD) DSP DSP program V404530 Quick Reference Card DVD MENU VCR CBL/DBS TV POWER POWER POWER POWER Numeric buttons CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL ENTER CHANNEL UP DOWN CHANNEL ENTER CHANNEL UP DOWN +10 CLEAR DISC SKIP TV VOLUME TITLE/INDEX TV VOLUME TV POWER MENU LEFT TITLE DISPLAY TV POWER TV INPUT MENU UP MENU RIGHT MENU SELECT SET UP TV VOLUME DISPLAY TV POWER VCR REC (*1) PLAY MENU DOWN RETURN REWIND TV INPUT PAUSE STOP FAST FORWARD MENU *1: Press this button twice to start recording. *1: Appuyer deux fois sur cette touche pour démarrer l’enregistrement. *1: Diese Taste zweimal drücken, um die Aufnahme zu starten. *1: Tryck två gånger på denna knapp för att starta inspelningen. +100 MENU LEFT MENU SELECT TV INPUT MENU UP MENU RIGHT MENU DOWN RECALL CHANNEL ENTER CHANNEL UP DOWN TV MUTE TV SLEEP TV POWER VCR REC (*1) TV EFFECT ON/OFF TV VOLUME DISPLAY TV INPUT VCR PAUSE VCR PLAY VCR REWIND MENU VCR STOP VCR FAST FORWARD *1: Premere due volte questo tasto per iniziare la registrazione. *1: Presione dos veces este botón para empezar a grabar. *1: Druk tweemaal op deze toets om met opnemen te beginnen. V404530